Каталог продукции DUNGS

Transcription

1 По вопросам продаж и поддержки обращайтесь: Архангельск (818) Астана (717)77 13 Белгород (47) Брянск (483) Владивосток (43) Волгоград (844) Вологда (817) Воронеж (473) Екатеринбург (343) Иваново (493) Ижевск (341) Казань (843) Калининград (401) Калуга (484) Кемерово (384) Киров (833) Краснодар (861) Красноярск (391) Курск (471) Липецк (474) Магнитогорск (3519) Москва (495) Мурманск (815) Набережные Челны (855) Нижний Новгород (831) Новокузнецк (3843) Новосибирск (383) Орел (486) Оренбург (353) Пенза (841) Пермь (34) Ростов на Дону (863) Рязань (491) Самара (846) Санкт Петербург (81) Саратов (845) Смоленск (481) Сочи (86) Ставрополь (865) Тверь (48) Томск (38) Тула (487) Тюмень (345) Ульяновск (84) Уфа (347) Челябинск (351) Череповец (80) Ярославль (485) Единый адрес: dsg@nt-rt.ru Веб сайт: Каталог продукции DUNGS

2 Ball Valve Technical description Rp 1/4 to Rp ball valve, PN 5 as per DIN EN 331. DN 5 to DN 00 ball valve, PN 16 as per DIN EN 13774, Part 1. Rugged and very user-friendly design. Application The ball valve is for manual shut-off and for releasing gases of families 1,, 3 and other neutral gaseous media. Other media are air, water, light and domestic heating oils. Each gas train in conventional design or as DUNGS GasMultiBloc must be completed with a ball valve. Approvals EC type test approval as per EC Gas Appliance Directive: KH 50.. CE-0085 BU 015 KH CE-0085 AT 0437 KH CE-0085 BN 0185 EC type test approval as per EC Pressure Equipment Directive: KH 50.. CE0035 KH CE0035 HTB 650 C KH Approvals in other important gas consuming countries. 1 4

3 Dimensions [mm] Specifications Thread design KH 50 Internal thread Rp 1/4 to Rp - DIN 999 External thread R 1/4 bis R - ISO 7-1 Tube diameter DN 8 to DN 50 Operating pressure max. 5 bar Temperature range -30 C to +170 C (in general) -0 C to +60 C (gas) Housing brass, chrome-plated Ball brass, chrome-plated Seal PTFE O rings Viton Handle grip stainless steel with plastic coating Flange design KH 160 Flange as per DIN EN 109- Overall length DN as per DIN 30-F4 Overall length DN 00 as per DIN 30-F5 Nominal diameters DN 5 to DN 00 Operating pressure max. 16 bar, Standard max. 4 bar, DN Temperature range -0 C to +60 C (gas) Housing spheroidal graphite iron casting (GGG40) Ball hollow ball design (stainless steel) Seal PTFE O rings Viton, Perburan Handle grip annealed cast iron/aluminium free of nonferrous metals 4

4 Overview Article designation 1) Order no. Max. operating pressure Connection threads Connection Rp/DN Dimensions [mm] a b c SW ) Weight [kg] KH 500 II KH 5003 II KH 5005 II KH 5007 II KH 5010 II KH 501 II KH 5015 II KH 500 II bar 5 bar 5 bar 5 bar 5 bar 5 bar 5 bar 5 bar Internal / internal Internal / internal Internal / internal Internal / internal Internal / internal Internal / internal Internal / internal Internal / internal Rp 1/4 Rp 3/8 Rp 1/ Rp 3/4 Rp 1 Rp 1 1/4 Rp 1 1/ Rp KH 500 IA KH 5003 IA KH 5005 IA KH 5007 IA KH 5010 IA KH 501 IA KH 5015 IA KH 500 IA bar 5 bar 5 bar 5 bar 5 bar 5 bar 5 bar 5 bar Internal / external Internal / external Internal / external Internal / external Internal / external Internal / external Internal / external Internal / external Rp 1/4 Rp 3/8 Rp 1/ Rp 3/4 Rp 1 Rp 1 1/4 Rp 1 1/ Rp KH KH KH KH KH KH KH / 16 bar 3) 4 / 16 bar 3) 4 / 16 bar 3) 4 / 16 bar 3) 4 / 16 bar 3) 4 / 16 bar 3) 4 / 16 bar 3) DN 5 DN 3 DN 40 DN 50 DN 65 DN 80 DN KH KH bar 16 bar DN 15 DN KH bar DN ) KH = Ball valve ) SW = wrench width 3) 4 HTB 650 C 3 4

5 Ball Valve Technical description Rp 1/4 to Rp ball valve, PN 5 as per DIN EN 331. DN 5 to DN 00 ball valve, PN 16 as per DIN EN 13774, Part 1. Rugged and very user-friendly design. Application The ball valve is for manual shut-off and for releasing gases of families 1,, 3 and other neutral gaseous media. Other media are air, water, light and domestic heating oils. Each gas train in conventional design or as DUNGS GasMultiBloc must be completed with a ball valve. Approvals EC type test approval as per EC Gas Appliance Directive: KH 50.. CE-0085 BU 015 KH CE-0085 AT 0437 KH CE-0085 BN 0185 EC type test approval as per EC Pressure Equipment Directive: KH 50.. CE0035 KH CE0035 HTB 650 C KH Approvals in other important gas consuming countries. 1 4

6 Dimensions [mm] Specifications Thread design KH 50 Internal thread Rp 1/4 to Rp - DIN 999 External thread R 1/4 bis R - ISO 7-1 Tube diameter DN 8 to DN 50 Operating pressure max. 5 bar Temperature range -30 C to +170 C (in general) -0 C to +60 C (gas) Housing brass, chrome-plated Ball brass, chrome-plated Seal PTFE O rings Viton Handle grip stainless steel with plastic coating Flange design KH 160 Flange as per DIN EN 109- Overall length DN as per DIN 30-F4 Overall length DN 00 as per DIN 30-F5 Nominal diameters DN 5 to DN 00 Operating pressure max. 16 bar, Standard max. 4 bar, DN Temperature range -0 C to +60 C (gas) Housing spheroidal graphite iron casting (GGG40) Ball hollow ball design (stainless steel) Seal PTFE O rings Viton, Perburan Handle grip annealed cast iron/aluminium free of nonferrous metals 4

7 Overview Article designation 1) Order no. Max. operating pressure Connection threads Connection Rp/DN Dimensions [mm] a b c SW ) Weight [kg] KH 500 II KH 5003 II KH 5005 II KH 5007 II KH 5010 II KH 501 II KH 5015 II KH 500 II bar 5 bar 5 bar 5 bar 5 bar 5 bar 5 bar 5 bar Internal / internal Internal / internal Internal / internal Internal / internal Internal / internal Internal / internal Internal / internal Internal / internal Rp 1/4 Rp 3/8 Rp 1/ Rp 3/4 Rp 1 Rp 1 1/4 Rp 1 1/ Rp KH 500 IA KH 5003 IA KH 5005 IA KH 5007 IA KH 5010 IA KH 501 IA KH 5015 IA KH 500 IA bar 5 bar 5 bar 5 bar 5 bar 5 bar 5 bar 5 bar Internal / external Internal / external Internal / external Internal / external Internal / external Internal / external Internal / external Internal / external Rp 1/4 Rp 3/8 Rp 1/ Rp 3/4 Rp 1 Rp 1 1/4 Rp 1 1/ Rp KH KH KH KH KH KH KH / 16 bar 3) 4 / 16 bar 3) 4 / 16 bar 3) 4 / 16 bar 3) 4 / 16 bar 3) 4 / 16 bar 3) 4 / 16 bar 3) DN 5 DN 3 DN 40 DN 50 DN 65 DN 80 DN KH KH bar 16 bar DN 15 DN KH bar DN ) KH = Ball valve ) SW = wrench width 3) 4 HTB 650 C 3 4

8 DMA Actuator drives for - Motorised Butterfly Valve DMK - Motorised throttle DML 11.0 DMA 40 P 30/0 3 L DMA 30 P 30/03 0 L DMA 30 Q 30/10 0 L DMA 30 A 30/10 0 L 1 8 Technical description Various actuator drives are available for the Dungs DMK motorised butterfly valves and DML motorised throttle: - Actuators with cams - Electronic actuators with analog output signal The DMA...P/Q/A actuator is distinguished by: - continuously adjustable cams - a mechanical position indicator readable from the outside - a freely selectable mounting position - maintenance-free operation - switchover between Automatic and Manual (option) - position feedback (option) The selection of the actuator drive depends on the type of application. Application The actuator drives, which guarantee a precise rotation between 0 and 90 C, are used in combination with the DUNGS DMK motorised butterfly valve and DML motorised throttle to control the gas supply or the air supply to gasburning appliances e.g. gas burners. Approvals The actuator drives comply with the basic requirements of the EMC and low-voltage guideline.

9 Actuator drives Technical data Type DMA 40 P 30/0 3 L DMA 40 P 30/0 4 L DMA 30 P 30/03 0 L Order No Operating time for s 40 s 30 s Switch-on duration ED 5 % / 100 % 5 % / 100 % 5 % / 100 % Motor/relay Voltage/frequency ~(AC) 30 V 50 Hz ~(AC) 30 V 50 Hz ~(AC) 30 V 50 Hz Ambient temperature 0 C to 60 C 0 C to 60 C 0 C to 60 C Weight approx. 0.4 kg approx. 0.5 kg approx. 0.5 kg Power consumption max. 3 VA max. 3 VA max. 3 VA Operating mode automatic automatic / manual automatic / manual Rotation angle adjustment 3 cams 4 cams 3 cams Potentiometer Function, colours - min. - max. - potential-free, travelling yellow red blue yellow red x blue red yellow yellow Adjustment by Lever Lever Lever Adjustment screw Potentiometer - optionally retrofittable yes Control ~(AC) 30 V 50 Hz ~(AC) 30 V 50 Hz 4 to 0 ma Output to 0 ma Separate power output V Direction of rotation of the shaft left left left closed open Cable entry 1 x PG9 1 x PG9 x PG9 Nominal torque 00 Ncm 00 Ncm 300 Ncm Static holding torque 00 Ncm 00 Ncm 00 Ncm Permissible lateral force on max. 60 N max. 60 N max. 60 N the shaft Shaft diameter 8 h8 mm 8 h8 mm 8 h8 mm y min. y max. - Shaft flat area 1 x 16 mm 1 x 16 mm 1 x 16 mm Degree of protection IP 40 IP 40 IP 40 (DIN 40050) Protection class EN Diagram I (closed) II (open) III M ~ IV output input I supply voltage output 10()A50V Auto 4 0 ma 4 0 ma REF 10 V N L N

10 Actuator drives Technical data Type DMA 30 Q 30/10 3 L DMA 30 Q 30/10 0 L Order No Operating time for s 30 s Switch-on duration ED 5 % / 100 % 5 % / 100 % Motor/relay Voltage/frequency ~(AC) 30 V 50 Hz ~(AC) 30 V 50 Hz Ambient temperature 0 C to 60 C 0 C t0 60 C Weight approx. 1.6 kg approx. 1.7 kg Power consumption max. 3 VA max. 3 VA Operating mode automatic automatic / manual Rotation angle adjustment 3 cams 3 cams Potentiometer Function, colours - min. - max. - potential-free, travelling yellow red blue red yellow yellow y min. y max. - Adjustment by Lever Lever Adjustment screw Potentiometer - yes Control ~(AC) 30 V 50 Hz 4 to 0 ma Output - 4 to 0 ma Separate power output - 10 V Direction of rotation of the shaft left left closed open Cable entry 1 x M16 x 1,5 mm x M16 x 1,5 mm Nominal torque 1000 Ncm 1000 Ncm Static holding torque 500 Ncm 500 Ncm Permissible lateral force on max. 100 N max. 100 N the shaft Shaft diameter 10 h8 mm 10 h8 mm Shaft flat area 1,5 x mm 1,5 x mm Degree of protection IP 54 IP 54 (DIN 40050) Protection class EN Diagram output input I supply voltage output 10()A50V 4 0 ma 4 0 ma REF 10 V N L N

11 Actuator drives Technical data Type DMA 30 A 30/10 3 LR DMA 30 A 115/10 3 LR DMA 30 A 4/10 3 LR Order No Operating time for s (5 s*) 30 s (5 s*) 30 s (± 10 % as a function of load) Switch-on duration ED 100 % / 100 % 100 % / 100 % 100 % / 100 % Motor/relay Voltage/frequency ~(AC) 30 V 50 (60) Hz ~(AC) 115 V 50 (60) Hz =(DC) 4 V Ambient temperature -15 C to 60 C -15 C to 60 C -15 C to 60 C Weight.3 kg.3 kg.3 kg Power consumption max. 7 VA max. 7 VA 5 W Operating mode automatic automatic automatic Rotation angle adjustment 3 cams 3 cams 3 cams Function - min. - max. - potential-free, travelling - min. - max. - potential-free, travelling - min. - max. - potential-free, travelling Adjustment by Hand Hand Hand Potentiometer optionally retrofittable optionally retrofittable optionally retrofittable Control (AC) 30 V 50 (60) Hz (AC) 115 V 50 (60) Hz (DC) 4 V Output Separate power output Direction of rotation of the shaft left / right left / right left / right closed open Cable entry 1 x M0 x 1,5 / 1 x M16 x 1,5 1 x M0 x 1,5 / 1 x M16 x 1,5 1 x M0 x 1,5 / 1 x M16 x 1,5 Nominal torque 1000 Ncm 1000 Ncm 1000 Ncm Static holding torque 1600 Ncm 1600 Ncm 1600 Ncm Permissible lateral force on max. 500 N max. 500 N max. 500 N the shaft Shaft diameter 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm Shaft flat area x 5 mm x 5 mm x 5 mm Degree of protection IP 65 IP 65 IP 65 (DIN 40050) Protection class EN Approval UL certified components UL certified components UL certified components Diagram *) Runtime at 60 Hz S1 SL SR M SL SR S1 C B 1 N A B

12 Actuator drives Technical data 5 8 Type DMA 30 A 30/10 0 LR DMA 30 A 115/10 0 LR Order No Operating time for s (5 s*) 30 s (5 s*) Switch-on duration ED 100 % / 100 % 100 % / 100 % Motor/relay Voltage/frequency ~(AC) 30 V 50 (60) Hz ~(AC) 115 V 50 (60) Hz Ambient temperature -10 C to 60 C -10 C to 60 C Weight.5 kg.5 kg Power consumption max. 7 VA max. 7 VA Operating mode automatic / manual automatic / manual Rotation angle adjustment cams Potentiometer cams Potentiometer Function Safety limit min. max. y min. y max. Safety limit min. max. y min. y max. Adjustment by Hand Friction clutch Hand Friction clutch Potentiometer yes yes Control 4 to 0 ma 4 to 0 ma Output 4 to 0 ma 4 to 0 ma Separate power output no no Direction of rotation of the shaft closed open left / right left / right Cable entry 1 x M0 x 1,5 / 1 x M16 x 1,5 1 x M0 x 1,5 / 1 x M16 x 1,5 Nominal torque 1000 Ncm 1000 Ncm Static holding torque 1600 Ncm 1600 Ncm Permissible lateral force on max. 500 N max. 500 N the shaft Shaft diameter 10 mm 10 mm Shaft flat area x 5 mm 1,5 x mm Degree of protection IP 65 IP 65 (DIN 40050) Protection class EN Approval UL certified components UL certified components Diagram *) Runtime at 60 Hz SL SR M SL SR PMR-NK 1-10k 1N A B max. 15V N L I 55U (-) (+) (-) (+) (+) Sammelstörmeldung 0(4)-0mA fault message information d`anomalie PE N L1 0(4)-0mA

13 Dimensions [mm] DMA...P Dimensions [mm] DMA...Q ø 16 k8 ø 10 h8 DUNGS type plate 30,1 39 ± 0,3 6 ± 0, 149 Screwed cable gland M16 x 1, ± 0, 33 ± 0, ,5-0,05 38 ± 0, 38 ± 0, 90 ø 5,4 ± 0, (4x) Installation: direct mounting to DMK...-P / DML by customer possible Installation: direct mounting to DMK...-Q by customer possible Actuator drives Type Degree of protection ø Shaft Comment Order No. DMA 40 P 30/0 3 L DMA 40 P 30/0 4 L DMA 30 P 30/03 0 L IP 40 IP 40 IP DMA 30 Q 30/10 3 L DMA 30 Q 30/10 0 L IP 54 IP Please state the motorised flap when ordering! Accessories Potentiometer retrofitting kit 1 kω DMA 40 P 30/0 4 L Order No

14 DMA Actuator drives for - Motorised Butterfly Valve DMK - Motorised Throttle DML Dimensions [mm] DMA...A Screwed cable gland M0 x 1,5 Screwed cable gland M16 x 1, M5 17 ø 10 Installation: direct mounting to DMK...-Q by customer possible Actuator drives Type Degree of protection ø Welle Comment Order No. DMA 30 A 30/10 3 LR P DMA 30 A 115/10 3 LR IP DMA 30 A 4/10 3 LR IP DMA 30 A 30/10 0 LR IP DMA 30 A 115/10 0 LR IP Please state the motorised flap when ordering! Accessories / Options Cam retrofit kit ( Pieces) Potentiometer retrofitting kit 1 kω Service switch for Manual/Automatic Model for -40 C of ambient temperature Order No. P 65 DMA 30 A.../10 3 on request IP 65 DMA 30 A.../10 3 on request IP 65 DMA 30 A.../10 3 on request DMA 30 A.../10 3 on request We reserve the right to make any changes in the interest of technical progress. 7 8

15 Motorised Butterfly Valve DMK Nominal Diameter Rp 3/4 - Rp DMK...-Q DMK...-P 1 6 Technical description The DUNGS DMK motorised butterfly valve is an actuator without zero shut-off as per DIN 3394, Sheet. Input-side male thread and output-side female thread enable a space-saving assembly directly on DUNGS multiple actuators, solenoid valves and other actuators: - Max. operating pressure: 500 mbar (50 kpa) - Max. differential pressure: 100 mbar (10 kpa) - Group R 0 as per DIN 3394, Sheet. - Application-specific throat diameter selection of throttle valves - Standard actuator drives: DMA...P..., DMA...Q..., DMA...A... other drives supplied on request - Reduced installation length by combination of female and male threads - Functional, rugged and maintenance-free - Low weight Application The DUNGS DMK motorised butterfly valve is used for regulating the gas supply on gas burners and gas equipment. The motorised butterfly valve can be used for gases of families 1,, 3 and other neutral gaseous media. Does not contain any non-ferrous metals, suitable for gases of up to max. 0.1 vol.% H S, dry. Approval EC type test approval as per EC Gas Appliance Directive: DMK 5... CE-0085 AP0165 Approvals in other important gas consuming countries.

16 DMK Actuator without zero shut-off for regulating tasks. Prepared for mechanical and electromechanical actuator drives. Specifications of type DMK... Pipe thread as per ISO 7/1 Max. differential pressure Max. difference pressure Actuator Gap volumetric flow in position closed (0 ) Torque Actuator angle Diameter of throat DN R 3/ /4 1 1/ Male thread at input Rp 3/ /4 1 1/ Female thread at output 500 mbar (50 kpa) 100 mbar (10 kpa) Actuator as per DIN 3394, Sheet, Group R o see Diagram 1 min. 50 Ncm max. 90 DMK mm Preferred diameter 11, 13, 15, 17 DMK mm Preferred diameter 15, 17, 19, 1 DMK mm Preferred diameter 15, 17, 19, 1, 3, 5 DMK mm Preferred diameter 4, 6, 8, 3 DMK mm Preferred diameter 3, 36, 40, 46 Materials of gas-conveying parts Housing: Shaft: Seals: aluminium steel NBR Ambient temperature Installation position 15 C to + 70 C Use with actuator drive, type DMA... P/Q... any installation position Use with other actuator drives: refer to specifications of actuator drive Specifications of actuator drives Type DMA... P/Q/A..., see Data Sheet

17 Functional description The DUNGS motorised butterfly valve is an automatic actuator driven by auxiliary energy. The electromechanical actuator drive determines the position of the valve. Partial load and full load setting of the valve are specified by adjusting the switching cams of the actuator drive. The acting time is specified by selecting the actuator drive. If the operating voltage (auxiliary energy) is interrupted, the actuator remains in its current position. Installation - When installing, refer to the flow direction ( arrow) on the housing. - Keep to the specified installation position. - Do not use actuator as lever when screwing unit in. Use suitable tools on housing. Perform leakage and functional tests after mounting. Direct contact between hardening masonry, concrete walls, floors and motorised butterfly valve is not permitted. Set pressure reference value on gas pressure regulator. Only perform load reduction via motorised butterfly valve. k v values of valves with preferred throat diameter Preferred diameter [mm] DMK 507 DMK 510 Valve position ø 11 ø 13 ø 15 ø 17 ø 19 ø 1 ø 3 ø 4 ø 5 ø 6 ø 8 ø 3 ø 36 ø 40 ø DMK DMK DMK Equipment selection The following values must be known for the DMK rating: 1. Maximum volumetric flow V max.. Pressure loss p at maximum volumetric flow. 3. Minimum volumetric flow V min. 4. Pressure loss p at minimum volumetric flow The throat diameter can be determined optionally using the k v value or the diagrams 1, and 3. Check whether the required minimum volumetric flow is attained in valve position 0. If the calculated or read-off value is below the specified minimum volumetric flow, the valve can be used. At smaller volumetric flows, the pressure loss of upstream equipment is reduced and the available p of the valve increases. Always select the valve with the largest p pressure loss ( p > 10 mbar) to achieve a good regulating behaviour. k v values for DMK motorised butterfly valve The DMK motorised butterfly valve is limited by the following parameters: Operating pressure p max. = 500 mbar Pressure loss p max. = 100 mbar For use in the area of subcritical flow condition, the following applies: V n = 514 k v p p ρ n T 1 V n [ m 3 / h] volumetric flow, normal state p [bar] pressure loss via DMK p [bar] pressure downstream of DMK, absolute ρ n [kg /m 3 ] standard density of gas T 1 [K] gas temperature upstream of DMK, absolute 3 6

18 Flow diagram 1 DMK DMK 50 V min. valve position 0, valve closed ø11 ø13 ø15 ø17 ø19 ø1 ø3 ø4 ø5 ø6 ø8 ø3 ø40 ø36 ø p [mbar] Basis + 15 C, 1013 mbar, trocken Based on + 15 C, 1013 mbar, dry Base + 15 C, 1013 mbar, sec Base + 15 C, 1013 mbar, secco 0,1 0, 0,3 0,4 0,6 0,8 1, Vn [m 3/h] Luft / Air / Aria dv = 1,00 0, 0,3 0,4 0,6 0,8 1, Vn [m 3/h] Erdgas / Natural gas / Gaz naturel / Gas metano dv = 0,65 Flow diagram DMK 510 V max. valve position 90, valve open operating range DMK 510 ø15 ø17 ø19 ø1 p [mbar] Basis + 15 C, 1013 mbar, trocken Based on + 15 C, 1013 mbar, dry Base + 15 C, 1013 mbar, sec Base + 15 C, 1013 mbar, secco Vn [m 3/h] Luft / Air / Aria dv = 1, Vn [m 3/h] Erdgas / Natural gas / Gaz naturel / Gas metano dv = 0,65 4 6

19 Flow diagram 3 DMK DMK 510 V max. valve position 90, valve open operating range DMK 507 ø11 ø13 ø15 ø17 DMK 515 ø4 ø6 ø8 ø p [mbar] Basis + 15 C, 1013 mbar, trocken Based on + 15 C, 1013 mbar, dry Base + 15 C, 1013 mbar, sec Base + 15 C, 1013 mbar, secco Vn [m 3/h] Luft / Air / Aria dv = 1, Vn [m 3/h] Erdgas / Natural gas / Gaz naturel / Gas metano dv = 0,65 Flow diagram 4 DMK 51, DMK 50 V max. valve position 90, valve open operating range DMK 51 DMK 50 ø15 ø17 ø19 ø1ø3 ø5 ø3 ø36 ø40 ø46 p [mbar] Basis + 15 C, 1013 mbar, trocken Based on + 15 C, 1013 mbar, dry Base + 15 C, 1013 mbar, sec Base + 15 C, 1013 mbar, secco Vn [m 3 /h] Luft / Air / Aria dv = 1, Vn [m 3 /h] Erdgas / Natural gas / Gaz naturel / Gas metano dv = 0,65

20 Motorised Butterfly Valve DMK Dimensions [mm] DMK 507-P/Q 50-P/Q A B C D DMK ,0 76,0 40,0 70,0 DMK ,5 86,5 50,0 75,0 DMK 51 66,0 86,5 50,0 75,0 DMK ,0 90,0 60,0 80,0 DMK 50 70,0 98,0 75,0 87,5 F Motor B E A DIN 3394 Gr. Ro ID-Nr. CE-0085Ap0165 C D G Motor coupling Set screw ISO 409-M5x6 F 40 A B E C D G Type Rp/R ø [mm] Order No. DMK...-P Order No. DMK...-Q DMK 507 3/ DMK 507 3/ DMK 507 3/ DMK 507 3/ DMK on request DMK on request DMK on request DMK DMK / on request DMK / on request DMK / DMK / on request DMK / on request DMK / DMK / on request DMK / DMK / 8 61 on request DMK / on request DMK DMK on request DMK on request DMK Mounting plate DMA...P Mounting plate DMA...Q Actuators E F G ø Shaft Comment Order No. Type DMA 40 P 30/0 3 IP on mounting plate DMA 40 P 30/0 4 IP DMK...-P DMA 30 P 30/03 0 IP DMA 30 Q 30/10 3 IP on mounting plate 5 73 DMA 30 Q 30/10 0 IP DMK...-Q 5 71 DMA 30 A 30/10 3 LR IP DMA 30 A 115/10 3 LR IP on mounting plate DMA 30 A 4/10 3 LR IP DMK...-Q DMA 30 A 30/10 0 LR IP DMA 30 A 115/10 0 LR IP When ordering, please specify actuator! 6 6

21 Motorised butterfly valve DMK Nominal Diameters DN 40 to DN DMK...-P DMK...-Q Technical description The DUNGS DMK... motorised butterfly valve is an actuator without zero shut-off as per DIN 3394 Sheet. The intermediate-flange design saves space when it is mounted directly on DUNGS multiple actuators, solenoid valves and other valves: - max. operating pressure 500 mbar (50 kpa) - max. differential pressure 50 mbar (5 kpa) - group R 0 as per DIN 3394 Sh. - standard actuator drives: DMA...P..., DMA...Q..., DMA...A... other drives available on request. Application The DUNGS DMK... motorised butterfly valve is used for controlling the gas supply to gas burners and gas-burning appliances. The motorised butterfly valve is suitable for gases of families 1,, 3 and other neutral gaseous media. Free of non-ferrous metals, suitable for gases up to max. 0.1% by vol. H S, dry. Approvals EC type test approval as per EC Gas Appliance Directive: DMK 5... CE-0085 AP0165 Approvals in other important gas consuming countries. 1 6

22 DMK Actuator with no zero shut-off for control tasks. Prepared for mechnical and electromechanical actuator drives. Technical data Nominal diameters Max. operating pressure Max. differential pressure Actuator Gap volume flow in closed position (O ) Torque Adjusting angle DN Intermediate flange to fit preweld flange as per DIN EN mbar (50 kpa) 50 mbar (5 kpa) Actuator as per DIN 3394 Sh., Group R 0 see Diagram 1 min. 150 Ncm max. 90 Throat valve diameters Gas-conveying component materials DMK 5040 DMK 5050 DMK 5065 DMK 5080 DMK 5100 DMK 515 Housing Shaft Seals 40 mm 50 mm 65 mm 80 mm 100 mm 15 mm Aluminium Steel NBR Ambient temperature Installation position -15 C to +70 C Any installation position; comply with technical data of actuator drive For technical data of actuator drives type DMA... P/Q/A..., see Data Sheet

23 Functional description The DUNGS motorised butterfly valve is an automatic actuator driven by auxiliary energy. The electromechanical actuator drive determines the butterfly valve position. Valve partial load and full load adjustment is defined by adjusting the related actuator drive switching cams. The actuating time depends on the actuator drive selected. If the operating voltage (auxiliary energy) is interrupted, the actuator remains in its current position. Installation - When installing, refer to the flow direction ( arrow) on the housing. - Keep to the specified installation position. Avoid direct contact between the motorised butterfly valve and dried masonry, concrete walls or floors. Only set the nominal pressure on the pressure regulator. Any output-related restriction should only be performed using the motorised butterfly valve. Check for leaks and function after installation. k V values of valves with preferred throat diameters Preferred diameters [mm] DMK 5040 DMK 5050 DMK 5065 DMK 5080 DMK 5100 DMK 515 Valve position Selecting the device You must know the following values to select the DMK variant: 1. Maximum volume flow V max. Pressure loss p at maximum volume flow 3. Minimum volume flow V min 4. Differential pressure in the closed valve position (= p e ) You can either determine the throat diameter by calculation using the k V value or using diagrams 1,, 3 and 4. Check whether the required minimum volume flow is reached when the valve is positioned at 0. If the calculated or measured value is below the required minimum volume flow, the valve can be used. If the volume flows are small, the pressure loss of upstream devices will fall. This increases the p available to the valve. To obtain an optimum control response, always choose the valve with the largest pressure loss ( p > 10 mbar). K V value for DMK motorised butterfly valve The DMK motorised butterfly valve is limited by the following parameters: operating pressure pmax = 500 mbar (50 kpa) differential pressure pmax = 50 mbar (5 kpa) When the valve is used in subcritical flow states, the following applies: V N [m 3 /h] volume flow, standard state p [bar] pressure drop across DMK p [bar] absolute pressure downstream of DMK ρ n [kg/m 3 ] standard gas density T 1 [K] absolute gas temperature upstream of DMK Vn = 514 k V p p ρ n T 1 3 6

24 Flow diagram 1 DMK DMK 515 V min valve position 0 Valve closed Working range Flow diagram DMK DMK 5080 V max valve position 90, Valve open Working range 4 6

25 Flow diagram 3 DMK 5050, DMK 5100 V max valve position 90 Valve open Working range Flow diagram 4 DMK 5065, DMK 515 V max valve position 90 Valve open Working range 5 6

26 Motorised butterfly valve DMK Nominal diameters DN 40 to DN 15 Dimensions [mm] DMK 5040-P/Q P/Q DMK...-P DMK...-Q B B A B Mounting plate DMA...P Mounting plate DMA...Q 38 C D G E 40 F ø Type DN ø [mm] A B C D Order No. DMK...-P Order No. DMK...-Q DMK on request DMK ,5 98, DMK ,5 109, DMK DMK DMK ,5 139, on request Actuators E F G ø Shaft Comment Order No. Type DMA 40 P 30/0 3 IP DMA 40 P 30/0 4 IP DMA 30 P 30/03 0 IP DMA 30 Q 30/10 3 IP DMA 30 Q 30/10 0 IP DMA 30 A 30/10 3 LR IP DMA 30 A 115/10 3 LR IP on mounting plate DMA 30 A 4/10 3 LR IP DMA...-Q DMA 30 A 30/10 0 LR IP DMA 30 A 115/10 0 LR IP When ordering, please specify actuator! 6 6

27 Double solenoid valve Nominal width Rp (DN 50) DN 65 - DN 15 DMV/1 DMV-D/1 DMV-DLE/ Technical Description The DUNGS double solenoid valve DMV consists of two solenoid valves in one compact unit: - Automatic shut-off valves as per DIN EN 161 Class A Group. - Two A-valves in one housing - Double disc valves - High flow rates - Max. operating overpressure 0.5 mbar (50 kpa) - Fast-closing - Fast-opening (DMV-D) or slow-opening (DMV-DLE) with adjustable fast stroke for start gas rate - Adjustable main load (DMV-D, DMV-DLE) - DC solenoid - Closed position signal contact can be mounted - Small dimensions, low weight Application Double solenoid valves are used at places where earlier two single valves were assembled. A large variety of regulation functions can be carried out by combining these valves with DUNGS gas pressure regulation devices and additional components. It does not contain any non-ferrous metals, suitable for gases of up to max. 0.1 vol.% H S, dry. Suitable for gases of families 1,, 3 and other neutral gaseous media. Approvals EU type test approval as per EU Gas Appliance Directive: DMV- D Rp (DN 50) CE-0085 BO 036 DMV- DN CE-0085 BO 036 EU type test approval as per EU Pressure Equipment Directive: DMV- DN CE0036 Approvals in other important gas-consuming countries.

28 Technical Data Nominal width Flanges Nominal diameters Flange with pipe thread as per ISO 7-1 Max. operating pressure Solenoid valve V1 Solenoid valve V Closing time Opening time Fast stroke Main load restrictor DN Connection flanges as per DIN 501 part 1 for welding neck flanges as per DIN 633 (PN16) DN 65 - DN 15, EN Length as per DIN 30 part 1, series F1 for DN 65 - DN 15 DMV 55/1 Rp and their combinations 500 mbar (50 kpa) automatic shut-off valve as per EN 161: Class A, Group automatic shut-off valve as per EN 161: Class A, Group < 1 s DMV/1 + DMV-D/1: < 1 s DMV-DLE/1: approx. 0 s at room temperature + 0 C and without fast stroke adjustable (DMV-DLE/1) adjustable (DMV-D/1, DMV-DLE/1) Material used for gas-conveying parts Ambient temperature Housing: Seals at the valve seat: -15 C to +60 C aluminium, steel, no non-ferrous heavy metals NBR-based, suitable for gases as per G60/I Installation position Dirt trap device Measuring gas connection Ignition gas connection Voltage / frequency Solenoid in upright vertical to horizontal position Filter integrated We recommend mounting an upstream gas filter to protect the entire gas train. See data sheet gas filter G 1/4 DIN ISO 8, in the centre before V1 and after V G 1/8 DIN ISO 8, on both sides before V1, between V1 and V, after V Ignition gas flange G 3/4, DIN ISO 8 possible on both sides between V1 and V ~(AC) Hz 30 V -15 % + 10 %, other voltages on request. Standard voltages: ~(AC) 110 V - 10 V, =(DC) 4 V - 8 V Power / current draw at~(ac) 30 V, + 0 C all indications are effective values Type DMV 55/1 DMV /1 DMV /1 DMV /1 DMV /1 Starting power approx. [W] x 65 x 95 x 15 x 15 x 130 Holding power approx. [W] x 16 x 0 x 5 x 5 x 5 Break-away starting current [A] x 0.3 x 0.54 x 0.54 x 0.54 x 0.56 Holding current [A] x 0.11 x 0.0 x 0.0 x 0.0 x 0.0 Degree of protection / switch-on duration IP 54 / 100 % duty Electrical connection Radio interference suppression Closed position signal contact Plug-in connection as per DIN EN Interference level N Type K01/1 (DIN tested) can be mounted at V1 and V 6

29 Dimensions for DMV b c d b c d f e a f e a Type Ordering no. Connection DN P max. [W] ~(AC) 30 V Opening time Dimensions in [mm] a b c d e f Solenoid No. Switching operations/h 1) Weight [kg] DMV 55/1 on request Rp (DN 50) 130 < 1 s /P DMV 5065/1 DMV-D 5065/1 DMV-DLE 5065/ DN 65 DN 65 DN < 1 s < 1 s < 0 s /P 1511/P 1511/PL DMV 5080/1 DMV-D 5080/1 DMV-DLE 5080/ DN 80 DN 80 DN < 1 s < 1 s < 0 s /P 1611/P 1611/PL DMV 5100/1 DMV-D 5100/1 DMV-DLE 5100/ DN 100 DN 100 DN < 1 s < 1 s < 0 s /P 1711/P 1711/PL DMV-D 515/ DN < 1 s /P Note: Plug-in connection and system accessories must be ordered separately. 1) Number of switching operations for DMV also depends on the opening time

30 DMV/1 DMV-D/1 DMV-DLE/1 Two single stage solenoid valves, de-energised in absence of current, fast-opening, fast-closing. Two single stage solenoid valves, de-energised in absence of current, fast-opening, fast-closing. Manual limitation of gas flow is possible with main load adjustment (D) at valve 1 (V1). Two single stage solenoid valves, de-energised in absence of current, slow-opening (L), fast-closing. Adjustment of opening time (E) with fast stroke range at valve (V). Manual limitation of gas flow is possible with main load adjustment (D) at valve 1 (V1). Variants Double solenoid valve DMV- /1 single stage operating mode DMV DMV-D DMV-DLE Filter Gas pressure switch can be mounted: on the flange after the filter, before V1 between V1 and V after valve valve V1, double seat valve V, double seat Valves open separately Ignition gas flange G 3/4 = standard () = on request -- = not possible 1 = only DN DMV/1 Rp (DN 50) DMV/1 DN 65 - DN 15 1 () 4 6

31 Modular system double solenoid valve Leakage gas valve Ignition gas flange Bypass valve, external p e,max. = 500 mbar V1 V Gas pressure switch, min. Closed position signal contact Closed position signal contact Gas pressure switch, max. Valve testing system System accessories The double solenoid valve has been designed for direct assembly of DUNGS system accessories and supplementary equipment. Information on system accessories Valve testing system VPS 504 Data sheet 8.10 Compact pressure switch for multiple actuators GW A5 Data sheet 5.0 Signal contact K01/1 for checking the closed position of valves Data sheet 1.01 If system accessories are assembled, it may not be possible to mount an additional device! 5 6 Pressure limiter for multiple actuators ÜB, NB A Data sheet 5.08

32 Double solenoid valve Nominal width Rp (DN 50) DN 65 - DN 15 DMV/1 DMV-D/1 DMV-DLE/ DMV 55/1 DMV-(DLE) 5065/1 DMV-(DLE) 5080/1 DMV-(DLE) 5100/1 DMV-(D) 515/ Basis Based on Base Base + 15 C, 1013 mbar, trocken + 15 C, 1013 mbar, dry + 15 C, 1013 mbar, sec + 15 C, 1013 mbar, secco Vn [m 3/h] Luft / Luft / Aria dv = 1, Vn [m 3/h] Erdgas/Naturgas/Gaz Naturel/Gas metano dv = 0,65 f = Dichte Luft Spec. weight air poids spécifique de l'air peso specifico aria Dichte des verwendeten Gases Spec. weight of gas used poids spécifique du gaz utilisé peso specifico del gas utilizzato Gas type Natural gas Town gas Liquefied gas Air Density [kg/m 3 ] dv f V verwendetes Gas/gas used/ gaz utilisé/gas utilizzato = V Luft/air/air/aria x f We reserve the right to make changes in the interest of technical progress. 6 6

33 Double solenoid valve Rp 3/8 - Rp nominal diameters DMV-D/11 DMV-DLE/ Technical description The DUNGS double solenoid valve DMV integrates two solenoid valves in one compact fitting. - Automatic shut-off valves as per DIN EN 161 Class A Group - Two A valves in one housing - Double seat valves - High flow rates - Max. operating pressure up to 500 mbar (50 kpa) - Fast closing - Fast opening (DMV-D/11) or slow opening (DMV-DLE/11) with adjustable fast stroke for start gas volume - Adjustable main volume - DC solenoid - Mountable closed position signal contact - Threaded flange - Compact, light-weight Application Double solenoid valves are used where two single valve were mounted previously. In connection with DUNGS gas regulators and additional components, a wide variety of regulating tasks can be performed. It does not contain any non-ferrous metals, suitable for gases of up to max. 0.1 vol.% H S, dry. Suitable for gases of families 1,, 3 and other neutral gaseous media. Approvals EC type test approval as per EC Gas Appliance Directive: Other models available with approval for the North American market: U L, FM, CSA as well as approvals in other important gas consuming countries.

34 DMV-D/11 DMV-DLE/11 Two single-stage solenoid valves normally closed, fast opening, fast closing. Manual limitation of flowing gas volume by main volume setting (D) at valve 1 (V1). Main volume setting (D) of DMV-D 503/11 at valve (V). Two single-stage solenoid valves normally closed, slow opening (L), fast closing. Opening time setting (E) with fast stroke section at valve (V). Manual limitation of flowing gas volume by main volume setting (D) at valve 1 (V1). Main volume setting (D) of DMV-D 503/11 at valve (V). Specifications Nominal diameters Flange with pipe thread as per ISO 7-1 Max. operating pressure Solenoid valve V1 Solenoid valve V Closing time Opening time Fast stroke Main volume restrictor DMV 503 DMV 507 DMV 51, 50 DMV 55 Rp 3/8,Rp 1/ Rp 1/,Rp 3/4,Rp 1 Rp 1,Rp 1 1/4,Rp 1 1/,Rp Rp and their combinations 500 mbar (50 kpa) Automatic shut-off valve as per EN 161: Class A, Group Automatic shut-off valve as per EN 161: Class A, Group < 1 s DMV-D /11: < 1 s DMV-DLE /11: approx. 0 s at room temperature +0 C and without fast stroke Adjustable DMV-D.../11 and DMV-DLE adjustable at V1, DMV-503/11 at V Materials of gas conveying parts Ambient temperature Housing: Seals at valve seat: -15 C to +60 C aluminium, steel, no non-ferrous metals NBR basis, suitable for gases as per G60/l Installation position Dirt trap Measuring gas connection Ignition gas connection Burner pressure monitor p Br Voltage/frequency Rating / power consumption Degree of protection Switch-on duration Electrical connection Radio interference Closed position signal contact Solenoid vertically upright to lying horizontally Sieve installed. To protect the complete gas train we recommend you to install an upstream gas filter (refer to Datasheet 11.0) G 1/8 DIN ISO 8 on both sides upstream of V1, between V1 and V, downstream of V at input and output flanges. Pressure switch can be mounted to input and output flanges. By mounting a pressure switch, measuring/ignition gas connection can be partly excluded. G 1/ ignition gas flange as per ISO 8, possible on both sides between V1 and V Connection downstream of V GW...A pressure switch can be mounted to the adapter laterally and to the flange Hz, 0 V - 40 V AC, -15 % +10 %, further voltages on request Other preferred voltages: Hz, 110 V - 10 V AC, 4 V - 8 V DC at 30 V AC, +0 C: refer to type overview IP % Plug connection as per DIN EN , PG* 11 cable gland on request (* = heavy-gauge conduit thread) Degree of interference N Type K01/1 (DIN tested), can be mounted to V1 and V, DMV-503/11 only to V 6

35 Dimensions for DMV-D/11 and DMV-DLE/11 Rp d e Space requirement for mounting the solenoid c Rp c d e a b Connection to DMV-503/11: M4 screw plug f g a b f g Version Order No. p max. [bar] Connection Rp a Dimensions [mm] b c d e f g Rating [VA] Switching rate h/ 1) Solenoid No. Weight [kg] DMV-D 503/11 DMV-D 507/11 DMV-D 51/11 DMV-D 50/11 DMV-D 55/ Rp 3/8 - Rp 1/ Rp 1/ - Rp 1 Rp 1 - Rp Rp 1 - Rp Rp DMV-DLE 503/11 DMV-DLE 507/11 DMV-DLE 51/11 DMV-DLE 50/11 DMV-DLE 55/ Rp 3/8 - Rp 1/ Rp 1/ - Rp 1 Rp 1 - Rp Rp 1 - Rp Rp ) Switching rate of DMV-DLE 50.../11 depends on opening time setting Flange for DMV /11 Rp 3/8 Rp 1/ Rp 1/ Rp 3/4 Rp 1 Rp 1 Rp 1 1/4 Rp 1 1/ Rp Rp NPT 1/ 371 NPT 3/4 368 NPT NPT NPT 1 1/4 370 NPT 1 1/ 003 NPT NPT DMV 503/11 DMV 503/11 DMV 507/11 DMV 507/11 DMV 507/11 DMV 51/11 - DMV 50/11 DMV 51/11 - DMV 50/11 DMV 51/11 - DMV 50/11 DMV 51/11 - DMV 50/11 DMV 55/ Plug connection as per DIN EN DMV 503/11 - DMV 55/11 Important: Always order flange, plug connection and system accessories separately.

36 Equipment variants of DMV.../11 double solenoid valve, single-stage mode DMV 503/11 DMV 507/11 DMV 51/11 DMV 50/11 DMV 55/11 DMV-D DMV-DLE Sieve Microfilter element, two-layer Refer to pressure losses () () () () Gas pressure switch can be mounted: on flange downstream of sieve downstream of valve to adapter downstream of valve Valve V1, double-seat Valve V, single-seat Valve V, double-seat Valves opening separately Flange Rp 3/8 Rp 1/ Rp 3/4 Rp 1 Rp 1 1/4 Rp 1 1/ Rp G 1/ ignition gas flange can be mounted G 3/4 ignition gas flange can be mounted = standard () = on request -- = not possible Flow losses in (m 3 /h) air when installing the microfilter element Pressure loss [mbar] DMV 503/11 DMV 507/11 DMV 51/11 DMV 50/11 DMV 55/ ,

37 Double solenoid valve modular system Ignition gas valve Ignition gas flange P e, max. = 500 mbar V1 V Pressure switch can be mounted on flange FRI DMV DMV.../11 double solenoid valve with upstream FRI.../6 pressure regulator Min. gas pressure switch Valve proving system Max. gas pressure switch Gas pressure limiter on adapter Closed position signal contact Ignition gas flange Ignition gas valve P e, max. = 500 mbar V1 V Pressure switch can be mounted on flange DMV FRI Min. gas pressure switch DMV.../11 double solenoid valve with downstream FRI.../6 pressure regulator Valve proving system Max. gas pressure switch Gas pressure limiter on adapter Closed position signal contact Gas pressure regulator, type FRI The DMV /11 double solenoid valve is already prepared for connection with the gas pressure regulator, type FRI.../6 at the factory. The pressure regulator can be installed upstream or downstream of the double solenoid valve depending on the task. FRI.../6 mounting set to DMV.../11 Order No FRI /6 to DMV 507/11 Order No FRI /6 to DMV 51/11-50/11 Information on system accessories VPS 504 valve proving system Pressure regulator with integrated FRI gas filter Pressure limiter ÜB, NB...A for multiple actuators Compact pressure switch for multiple actuators GW A5 K01/1 closed position signal contact to monitor closed position of valves If a system accessory is added, it may not be possible to mount further devices. 5 6

38 Double solenoid valve Flow diagram Rp 3/8 - Rp nominal diameters DMV-D/11 DMV-DLE/11 f = Dichte Luft Spec. weight air poids spécifique de l'air peso specifico aria Dichte des verwendeten Gases Spec. weight of gas used poids spécifique du gaz utilisé peso specifico del gas utilizzato Gas type Nat. gas City gas LPG Air Density [kg/m 3 ] dv f V verwendetes Gas/gas used/ gaz utilisé/gas utilizzato = V Luft/air/air/aria x f We reserve the right to make any changes in the interest of technical progress. 6 6

39 Double solenoid valve Rp 3/8 - Rp nominal diameters DMV-D/11 DMV-DLE/ Technical description The DUNGS double solenoid valve DMV integrates two solenoid valves in one compact fitting. - Automatic shut-off valves as per DIN EN 161 Class A Group - Two A valves in one housing - Double seat valves - High flow rates - Max. operating pressure up to 500 mbar (50 kpa) - Fast closing - Fast opening (DMV-D/11) or slow opening (DMV-DLE/11) with adjustable fast stroke for start gas volume - Adjustable main volume - DC solenoid - Mountable closed position signal contact - Threaded flange - Compact, light-weight Application Double solenoid valves are used where two single valve were mounted previously. In connection with DUNGS gas regulators and additional components, a wide variety of regulating tasks can be performed. It does not contain any non-ferrous metals, suitable for gases of up to max. 0.1 vol.% H S, dry. Suitable for gases of families 1,, 3 and other neutral gaseous media. Approvals EC type test approval as per EC Gas Appliance Directive: Other models available with approval for the North American market: U L, FM, CSA as well as approvals in other important gas consuming countries.

40 DMV-D/11 DMV-DLE/11 Two single-stage solenoid valves normally closed, fast opening, fast closing. Manual limitation of flowing gas volume by main volume setting (D) at valve 1 (V1). Main volume setting (D) of DMV-D 503/11 at valve (V). Two single-stage solenoid valves normally closed, slow opening (L), fast closing. Opening time setting (E) with fast stroke section at valve (V). Manual limitation of flowing gas volume by main volume setting (D) at valve 1 (V1). Main volume setting (D) of DMV-D 503/11 at valve (V). Specifications Nominal diameters Flange with pipe thread as per ISO 7-1 Max. operating pressure Solenoid valve V1 Solenoid valve V Closing time Opening time Fast stroke Main volume restrictor DMV 503 DMV 507 DMV 51, 50 DMV 55 Rp 3/8,Rp 1/ Rp 1/,Rp 3/4,Rp 1 Rp 1,Rp 1 1/4,Rp 1 1/,Rp Rp and their combinations 500 mbar (50 kpa) Automatic shut-off valve as per EN 161: Class A, Group Automatic shut-off valve as per EN 161: Class A, Group < 1 s DMV-D /11: < 1 s DMV-DLE /11: approx. 0 s at room temperature +0 C and without fast stroke Adjustable DMV-D.../11 and DMV-DLE adjustable at V1, DMV-503/11 at V Materials of gas conveying parts Ambient temperature Housing: Seals at valve seat: -15 C to +60 C aluminium, steel, no non-ferrous metals NBR basis, suitable for gases as per G60/l Installation position Dirt trap Measuring gas connection Ignition gas connection Burner pressure monitor p Br Voltage/frequency Rating / power consumption Degree of protection Switch-on duration Electrical connection Radio interference Closed position signal contact Solenoid vertically upright to lying horizontally Sieve installed. To protect the complete gas train we recommend you to install an upstream gas filter (refer to Datasheet 11.0) G 1/8 DIN ISO 8 on both sides upstream of V1, between V1 and V, downstream of V at input and output flanges. Pressure switch can be mounted to input and output flanges. By mounting a pressure switch, measuring/ignition gas connection can be partly excluded. G 1/ ignition gas flange as per ISO 8, possible on both sides between V1 and V Connection downstream of V GW...A pressure switch can be mounted to the adapter laterally and to the flange Hz, 0 V - 40 V AC, -15 % +10 %, further voltages on request Other preferred voltages: Hz, 110 V - 10 V AC, 4 V - 8 V DC at 30 V AC, +0 C: refer to type overview IP % Plug connection as per DIN EN , PG* 11 cable gland on request (* = heavy-gauge conduit thread) Degree of interference N Type K01/1 (DIN tested), can be mounted to V1 and V, DMV-503/11 only to V 6

41 Dimensions for DMV-D/11 and DMV-DLE/11 Rp d e Space requirement for mounting the solenoid c Rp c d e a b Connection to DMV-503/11: M4 screw plug f g a b f g Version Order No. p max. [bar] Connection Rp a Dimensions [mm] b c d e f g Rating [VA] Switching rate h/ 1) Solenoid No. Weight [kg] DMV-D 503/11 DMV-D 507/11 DMV-D 51/11 DMV-D 50/11 DMV-D 55/ Rp 3/8 - Rp 1/ Rp 1/ - Rp 1 Rp 1 - Rp Rp 1 - Rp Rp DMV-DLE 503/11 DMV-DLE 507/11 DMV-DLE 51/11 DMV-DLE 50/11 DMV-DLE 55/ Rp 3/8 - Rp 1/ Rp 1/ - Rp 1 Rp 1 - Rp Rp 1 - Rp Rp ) Switching rate of DMV-DLE 50.../11 depends on opening time setting Flange for DMV /11 Rp 3/8 Rp 1/ Rp 1/ Rp 3/4 Rp 1 Rp 1 Rp 1 1/4 Rp 1 1/ Rp Rp NPT 1/ 371 NPT 3/4 368 NPT NPT NPT 1 1/4 370 NPT 1 1/ 003 NPT NPT DMV 503/11 DMV 503/11 DMV 507/11 DMV 507/11 DMV 507/11 DMV 51/11 - DMV 50/11 DMV 51/11 - DMV 50/11 DMV 51/11 - DMV 50/11 DMV 51/11 - DMV 50/11 DMV 55/ Plug connection as per DIN EN DMV 503/11 - DMV 55/11 Important: Always order flange, plug connection and system accessories separately.

42 Equipment variants of DMV.../11 double solenoid valve, single-stage mode DMV 503/11 DMV 507/11 DMV 51/11 DMV 50/11 DMV 55/11 DMV-D DMV-DLE Sieve Microfilter element, two-layer Refer to pressure losses () () () () Gas pressure switch can be mounted: on flange downstream of sieve downstream of valve to adapter downstream of valve Valve V1, double-seat Valve V, single-seat Valve V, double-seat Valves opening separately Flange Rp 3/8 Rp 1/ Rp 3/4 Rp 1 Rp 1 1/4 Rp 1 1/ Rp G 1/ ignition gas flange can be mounted G 3/4 ignition gas flange can be mounted = standard () = on request -- = not possible Flow losses in (m 3 /h) air when installing the microfilter element Pressure loss [mbar] DMV 503/11 DMV 507/11 DMV 51/11 DMV 50/11 DMV 55/ ,

43 Double solenoid valve modular system Ignition gas valve Ignition gas flange P e, max. = 500 mbar V1 V Pressure switch can be mounted on flange FRI DMV DMV.../11 double solenoid valve with upstream FRI.../6 pressure regulator Min. gas pressure switch Valve proving system Max. gas pressure switch Gas pressure limiter on adapter Closed position signal contact Ignition gas flange Ignition gas valve P e, max. = 500 mbar V1 V Pressure switch can be mounted on flange DMV FRI Min. gas pressure switch DMV.../11 double solenoid valve with downstream FRI.../6 pressure regulator Valve proving system Max. gas pressure switch Gas pressure limiter on adapter Closed position signal contact Gas pressure regulator, type FRI The DMV /11 double solenoid valve is already prepared for connection with the gas pressure regulator, type FRI.../6 at the factory. The pressure regulator can be installed upstream or downstream of the double solenoid valve depending on the task. FRI.../6 mounting set to DMV.../11 Order No FRI /6 to DMV 507/11 Order No FRI /6 to DMV 51/11-50/11 Information on system accessories VPS 504 valve proving system Pressure regulator with integrated FRI gas filter Pressure limiter ÜB, NB...A for multiple actuators Compact pressure switch for multiple actuators GW A5 K01/1 closed position signal contact to monitor closed position of valves If a system accessory is added, it may not be possible to mount further devices. 5 6

44 Double solenoid valve Flow diagram Rp 3/8 - Rp nominal diameters DMV-D/11 DMV-DLE/11 f = Dichte Luft Spec. weight air poids spécifique de l'air peso specifico aria Dichte des verwendeten Gases Spec. weight of gas used poids spécifique du gaz utilisé peso specifico del gas utilizzato Gas type Nat. gas City gas LPG Air Density [kg/m 3 ] dv f V verwendetes Gas/gas used/ gaz utilisé/gas utilizzato = V Luft/air/air/aria x f We reserve the right to make any changes in the interest of technical progress. 6 6

45 Control device for system leakage test DSLC px Vx 8.1 Visual display of the entire program sequence Display of the leaky valve Display remains visible if there is loss of voltage IP 4 Technical description Together with one or two gas pressure switches, the DSLC control device built according to EN 1643 for system leakage tests checks the burner gas shut-off valves for leakage. A synchronous gear motor with control cams controls the DSLC program sequence via microswitches. Application The DSLC is suitable for automatic leakage tests between two solenoid valves in gas-consuming devices. The testing system can be used alone for leakage tests or combined with all types of automatic burner control systems. It can be used in gas burner control systems for heating and industrial purposes, gas combustion motors etc., with or without pipes for venting into the open air. Approvals EU type test approval as per EU Gas Appliance Directive: DSLC px Vx CE-0085 AQ 0808 EU type test approval as per EU Pressure Equipment Directive: DSLC px Vx CE0036 Approvals in other important gas-consuming countries. 1 8

46 DSLC px Vx Control device built according to EN 1643:001-0 for system leakage tests for all pressures (px) and unlimited testing volume (Vx) Technical data Nominal voltage = (DC) 4 V (± 0 %) Test volume Power requirement Back-up fuse (to be provided by the customer) min. 1,5 l approx. 5 VA 10 A flink oder 6,3 A träge Kontaktbelastung Operating output (terminal 15) max. 4 A Fault output (terminal 5) max. 1 A Pressure switch (terminals 1,, 11) min. 1 A Fault unlocking (terminals 4, 7) min. 1 A Valves (terminals 9, 10, 14) max. A Degree of protection IP 4 Ambient temperature 0 C to +60 C Test cycle Valve opening times Test time V1 (valve on gas side) Test time V (valve on burner side) Switch-on duration of the control Installation position The permissible breaking capacities must be observed! The current input of all solenoid valves, motors etc. which are switched via the controller circuit must not exceed 4 A. approx. 60 s max. 3 s min. s min. 0 s 100 % ED any Program flowchart DSLC px Vx Regulator 3 s Discharge Test time 1 (V1) Fill Test time (V) Release Regulator terminal 15 approx. 5 s 3 s approx. s Display Time V1 (blue) V (red) s 8

47 Functional description and program sequence shown with 1 pressure switch The section from valve seat V1 to valve seat V is called test section. The DSLC performs a test before every burner start-up, i.e. when heat is requested by the controller or after the unit is switched off due to loss of mains voltage, gas shortage etc. The test consists of two phases: 1. Test of the valve (V1) on the gas inlet side. Test of the valve (V) on the burner side When heat is required, the controller circuit is closed, and the DSLC receives voltage and starts the test cycle (approx. 60 s). At the beginning of the first test phase (figure 1a), valve V is opened for max. 3 s. The pressure in the test section must drop to atmospheric pressure, i.e., the pressure switch P p must switch back after the pressure is relieved. If it is not possible to evacuate the test section, the pressure is relieved again after 60 s. During the subsequent test time (figure 1b) the pressure built up in the test section must not exceed the switch point of the pressure switch P p. However, if this happens due to leakage in solenoid valve V1, the DSLC takes the fault position and prevents the burner from being started. The red fault display lights up. There is voltage at terminal 5 of the device for teleindication of the fault. The DSLC opens valve V1 for max. 3 s before the second test phase (figure a). Thus, the test section is under gas pressure, and the second test phase begins. During the subsequent test time (figure b) the pressure in the test section must not drop below the switch point of the pressure switch P p. However, if the pressure falls due to leakage in valve V, the pressure switch P p reports this and the DSLC is locked in the fault position. All parts lying in the test section, such as pressure switches, pipes, screw joints etc., are simultaneously tested for leakage. Only after the second test phase, too, shows that all parts are properly sealed, the DSLC through-connects the controller circuit (voltage at terminal 15) and enables the program sequence for starting up the burner. 1a 1b Test section Test section a b Test section Test section 3 8

48 Venting in the firing chamber According to EN1643 venting may be carried out in the firing chamber if the volume released [m 3 ] per test cycle does not exceed 0.05 % of the nominal volume flow [m 3 /h]. Example: For a nominal volume flow of 100 m 3 /h, the permissible volume is 0.05 m 3 = 50 dm 3 Schematic diagrams 1. Valve test with auxiliary valves V3, LGV. Valve test with auxiliary valves V3, V4 Test section Test section 3. Direct valve test V1 with auxiliary valve V4 or LGV 4. Direct valve test V1, V or Test section Test section Legend to schematic diagrams V1 Safety solenoid valve V Burner solenoid valve V3 Filling gas solenoid valve V4 Discharge solenoid valve LGV Leakage gas solenoid valve P p Test pressure switch The function principle must be selected according to local regulations! 161! The valves used must meet the requirements of EN Nominal diameter For main actuators > DN 65, auxiliary valves should be used. Avoiding leakage The most common reason for leaky actuators is dirt accumulation. Therefore, the gas filter preceding the gas control section must be sufficiently large. Special attention must be paid to loss of pressure in the filter, i.e. the filter must be checked and cleaned at regular intervals. 4 8

49 Test pressure switch One or two pressure switches can be used for monitoring the pressure in the test section: A change-over contact is required if a common pressure switch (P p ) is used for test phases 1 and. The switch point of the pressure switch must be set to half of the gas flow pressure. If set properly, two pressure switches detect even small amounts of leaked gas. The amounts of leaked gas can be individually set to the required value for: test phase 1 (safety solenoid valve) with pressure switch P1 and test phase (burner solenoid valve) with pressure switch P. The pressure switches used must meet the requirements of EN 1854! Limit value The DSLC must prevent ignition and the opening of the actuators at a limit value < 0.1 % of the burner consumption (with regard to the burner capacity), or < 50 dm 3 /h (the higher value must be taken into account). We recommend that a max. limit value of 00 dm 3 /h should not be exceeded. Gas leakage rate The gas leakage rate can be recalculated using the equations, and the switch points of the test switches can be changed if necessary. Test volume of valves and pipelines Nominal diameters dm 3 dm 3 /m Rp DN Valve Pipeline 1/0,07 0,0 3/40,1 0,30 1 0,0 0,50 1 1/ 0,50 1,40 0,90, ,70 1, ,0,00 65,00 3, ,80 5, ,50 8, ,50 1, ,50 17, ,00 31,40 Test volume DSLC: min. 1,5 dm 3 V V1 = leak rate V1 V V = leak rate V (p 1 - p disch ) V P 3600 s/h V V1 = p atm t dm 3 /h test V1 (p filll - p ) V P 3600 s/h V V = dm p atm t 3 /h test V Calculation examples (calculation steps I and II) for a DN 100 test section: I) Calculation of the volume of the test section V1 + V, DN 100 V = 6.50 dm 3 Line DN 100, length 1.5 m V = 1.00 dm 3 V3 + V4, Rp ½ V = 0.07 dm 3 Line V3 / V4 1/, length m V = 0.40 dm 3 V p = 18,97 dm 3 II) Calculation of leak rates System with 1 pressure switch System with pressure switches Burner capacity 30 m 3 /h 400 m 3 /h p 1 11 mbar 60 mbar p 9 mbar 0 mbar p disch 1 mbar 18 mbar p fill 18 mbar 500 mbar p atm 1013 mbar 1013 mbar t testv1 5 s 5 s t testv s s limit value as per standard 50 dm 3 /h 400 dm 3 /h Recommended limit value 00 dm 3 /h Result of the calculation: Leak rate V1 V V1 = 6,97 dm 3 /h V V1 = 113,6 dm 3 /h Leak rate V V V = 7,58 dm 3 /h V V = 183,86 dm 3 /h Legend of the calculations: p 1 = switch point of pressure switch P1 or Pp rising [mbar] p atm = atmospheric pressure [mbar] p = switch point of pressure switch P or Pp falling [mbar] t testv1 = test time V1 [s] p disch = gas pressure after discharge [mbar] t testv = test time V [s] p 5 8 fill = gas pressure after filling [mbar] V p = test section volume [dm 3 ]

50 Switch points of the test pressure switch (1 pressure switch) Switch points of the test pressure switch ( pressure switches) p flow p fill p flow p fill Fault V1 leaky Operation (test section OK) Operation (test section OK) Fault V1 leaky p disch Fault V or gas line leaky p disch Fault V or gas line leaky closed GW open COM-NO P p COM-NC DischargeTest phase 1 Test phase Fill closed GW open closed P open closed P 1 open Discharge Test phase 1 Fill Test phase Switch contacts of pressure switch Switch contacts of pressure switch DSLC display of valves Direction of rotation V (red) DSLC fault positions Example 1: V1 (blue) large leak Example : V 1 (blue) The qualitative differentiation between small, medium and large is used for fault analysis only. However, the valves must always be regarded as leaky! V (red) medium leak Example 3: V (red) small leak Structure of the leakage control device DSLC px Vx Suppressor key Fault dislay Operational status indicator Display of the valves 6 8

51 DSLC connection diagram for valve test with auxiliary valves V3, LGV (for schematic diagram 1) DSLC connection diagram for valve test with auxiliary valves V3, V4 (for schematic diagram ) Input = (DC) 4 V + Input + = (DC) 4 V Output Output External fault display External fault display Remote unlocking Remote unlocking Gas supply Gas supply Pp External solenoid valve control Pp External solenoid valve control DSLC Discharge To burner DSLC To burner DSLC connection diagram for direct valve test V1 with auxiliary valve V4 or LGV (for schematic diagram 3) DSLC connection diagram for direct valve test V1, V (for schematic diagram 4) Input + = (DC) 4 V Input + = (DC) 4 V Output Output External fault display External fault display Remote unlocking Remote unlocking Gas supply Gas supply Pp Pp External solenoid valve control External solenoid valve control DSLC Discharge To burner DSLC To burner 7 8 V1 V V3 Safety solenoid valve Burner solenoid valve Test gas solenoid valve V4 LGV P p Discharge solenoid valve Leakage gas solenoid valve Test pressure switch GW gas pressure switch (gas shortage). R Regulator

52 Control device for system leakage test DSLC px Vx Dimensions Type overview/ordering data Order no. DSLC px Vx - (DC) 4 V Accessories 150 Gas pressure switch see datasheets depending on the operating pressure, LGW A4 (5.08) GW A6 (5.01) GW A4 HP (5.04) Auxiliary solenoid valves see datasheets MV 50 (6.1) MVD, MVD/5, MVDLE/5 (6.0) LGV/5 (6.4) SV-D(LE) (6.01) 75 ø 4,5 100 ø 4, MP/N N 19 x x PG ø 15,8 Pressure switches (according to EN 1854) and auxiliary solenoid valves (according to EN 161) must be ordered separately. We reserve the right to make any changes in the interest of technical progress. 8 8

53 Pressure regulator FRNG Zero pressure regulator Proportional pressure regulator Compressed air-controlled pressure regulator Technical description The DUNGS pressure regulator, type FRNG, has an adjustable setpoint spring and defined counterspring. The pressure regulator complies with EN 88 and DIN 3380: - Input pressures up to 50 mbar (5 kpa) for zero pressure applications - Input pressures up to 00 mbar (0 kpa) for proportional pressure applications - Bypass prepared, Rp 3/8 to Rp - Sturdy, precise and sensitive regulation of regulator output pressure - Inlet pressure compensation diaphragms - Safety diaphragms - Internal pulse for regulator output pressure as standard, external pulse connection prepared - Connection for blower pressure as standard Application The DUNGS pressure regulator, type FRNG, is suitable for gases of families 1,, 3 and other neutral gaseous media. Does not contain any non-ferrous metals, suitable for gases of up to max. 0.1 vol.% H S, dry. Approval EC type test approval as per EC Gas Appliance Directive: FRNG 5 CE-0085 AQ716 Approvals in other important gas consuming countries.

54 FRNG Spring-loaded pressure regulator with adjustable setpoint spring and defined counterspring. Internal tap of regulator output pressure, external pulse and blower pressure connections prepared. Suitable for controlling regulator output pressure via a pneumatic command variable. Specifications Nominal diameters Pipe thread as per ISO 7/1 Flange Max. operating pressure Pressure regulator Input pressure range Zero pressure regulator Proportional pressure regulator Compressed air-controlled pressure regulator Output pressure range Materials of gas-conveying parts Ambient temperature Installation position Measuring/ignition gas connections Measurement opening Bypass Pulse connection Ventilation line / pressure connection for blower pressure Blower pressure command variable DN Rp 3/8 1/ 3/4 1 11/ Connection flange per DIN EN up to 500 mbar (50 kpa) Pressure regulator as per EN 88, Class A, Group, DIN 3380 RG 10, EN to 50 mbar (0.5 to 5 kpa) 5 to 00 mbar (0.5 to 0 kpa) to 500 mbar (50 kpa) Zero pressure regulator - 3 to 5 mbar (-0.3 to 0.5 kpa) Proportional pressure regulator -10 to 150 mbar (-1 to 15 kpa) Pressure with compressed air up to max. 350 mbar (35 kpa). Housing: aluminium, steel, no non-ferrous metals Seals and diaphragms: NBR 15 C to +70 C Regulator dome from vertically upright to lying horizontally Rp 1/ - DN 100 Regulator dome in vertical position DN 15, DN 150 G 1/4 ISO 8 on both sides in inlet section G 1/8 ISO 8 in the baseplate (option DN 15, DN 150) Reclosable opening for setting system-specific valuas when the system is put into operation, e. g. gas motor Bypass prepared: Rp 3/8 to Rp on right of housing Internal in outlet section, externally prepared on housing: Rp 3/8 to Rp 1 left, G 1/8; on both sides from Rp 1 1/, DN 40 G 1/4; internal pulse lockable Ventilation line needs no routing, use existing connection as pressure connection for command variable (blower pressure). Connection: G 1/4 to Rp 1; from Rp 1 1/, DN 40: G 1/ For proportional pressure applications and gas-air ratio applications at pressure ratio of approx. 1:1 and in compressed-air controlled operation: p max = 150 mbar (15 kpa) 8

55 Spring selection The output pressure is provided by the force of the installed adjustable spring, the counterspring and the the blower pressure applied. The pressure regulator is equipped with the brown spring No. 1 as standard. By exchanging the adjustable spring, it is possible to achieve larger positive zero point shifts (offsets) of the output pressure (refer to Fig. Compressed air-controlled pressure regulator). Setpoint spring range [mbar] Spring colour Nominal diameter Rp/DN Rp 3/8, Rp 1/ Rp 3/4 Rp 1 Rp 1 1/, DN 40 Rp, DN 50 DN 65, 80 DN 100 DN 15 DN Spring 1 brown Standard Spring white Spring 3 orange Spring 4 blue 5 55 Spring 5 red Spring 6 yellow Spring 7 black Spring 8 pink Spring to 9 for compressed air applications only Spring 9 grey Standard Offset 5 mbar (Closing force of counterspring in closed position) Dimensions b b e e c g g d h DN d h V1 DN + c a f a Type Order No. p max. [mbar] Rp / DN Dimensions [mm] a b c d e f g h Weight [kg] FRNG 503 FRNG 505 FRNG 507 FRNG 510 FRNG 515 FRNG Rp 3/8 Rp 1/ Rp 3/4 Rp 1 Rp 1 1/ Rp G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/ G 1/ G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/8 G 1/8 G 1/8 G 1/8 G 1/4 G 1/ FRNG 5040 FRNG 5050 FRNG 5065 FRNG 5080 FRNG 5100 FRNG 515 FRNG DN 40 DN 50 DN 65 DN 80 DN 100 DN 15 DN G 1/ G 1/ G 1/ G 1/ G 1/ G 1/ G 1/ G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/ Bypass restrictor Rp 3/8 - Rp 5 56

56 Functional description Functions according to the force comparison principle between the force of: - the adjustable setpoint spring - the defined counterspring - the differential pressure at the working diaphragm and - the force due to weight of the moving parts The counterspring acts against the adjustable spring and the weight due to force of the moving parts. Depending on the pretension of the adjustable spring and the installation position, the force of the counterspring is compensated. Overcompensation leads to positive regulator output pressures, partial compensation leads to negative regulator output pressures. Instructions Gas-conveying lines, pulse and connection lines must be made of steel and at least PN 1, DN 6. The lines must be resistant to thermal, chemical and mechanical loads. The lines must be durable and deformation- and crackproof. Do not route condensate from lines into the pressure regulator. Do not apply burning gas or combustion gas air mixtures to the installation chamber of the adjustable spring. FRNG 515 sectional drawing Pressure regulator in closed position p 1 p Housing Regulating cup 3 Pulse tap, internal 4 Compensation diaphragm 5 External pulse 6 Diaphragm disk 7 Working diaphragm 8 Safety diaphragm 9 Breathing plug 10 Setpoint spring 11 Adjustment device 1 Counterspring 13 Option DN 15, DN 150 Measurement opening with screw plug G 1/8 4 8

57 Application of zero pressure regulator (standard design) The FRNG regulates a gas flow proportional to the consumer vacuum for gas motors and self-intaking gas equipment. The regulator is adjusted within the setting range at the setpoint spring. V min. = V max. x 0.1 For V max, see volumetric flow pressure drop characteristic. Application with compressed aircontrolled pressure regulator (standard design) For externally controlled gas equipment. In connection with a selected setpoint spring, the regulator output pressure can be controlled depending on the blower pressure (compressed air). The command variable can be up to +150 mbar. V min. = V max. x 0.05 For V max, see volumetric flow pressure drop characteristic. Pressure taps Pulse and blower connection 1 Breathing plug or connection for ventilation line. Only route ventilation line in special cases or connection for air pulse line p [mbar] Pressure Mixer KH GF FRS DMV FRNG Gas motor KH GF FRS DMV FRNG Gas motor +5 Air filter p [mbar] -1 Blower Vacuum M Air filter Blower +5-3 Air Valve Pulse Industrial ϒ Pulse burner Vmax. Industrial KH GF DMV FRNG burner P +1 p KH GF DMV FRNG P [mbar] 100 % 95 % -1 Adjustable bypass restrictor -3 Adjustable FRNG bypass restrictor Vmax. FRNG ,95 : 1 Actual pressure ratio Pressure V acuum +1 Regulator output p [mbar] M P Blower Compressed air regulator L Blower pressure p Blower Compressed air regulator Pulse L Regulator output pressure Pulse p KH GF DMV FRNG [mbar] Sequential variable Regulator output pressure p p [mbar] Sequential variable Regulator output pressure p Resulting output pressure M Air Valve M Offset range for KH GF DMV regulator FRNG characteristic P P L Resulting output pressure 1 : 1 P P L P L Burner Mixer Offset range 100 for % regulator 95 % characteristic Control air 1 : 1 Blower pressure p L Command variable 1 Blower pressure p L 0 +1 or compressed air Burner Setting range p -3 mbar +5 mbar Setting range p -3 mbar +5 mbar 0,95 : 1 p Actual pressure ratio L [mbar] p L [mbar] Pretension of setpoint spring e.g. spring No. 6 (yellow) bar Command variable p Pretension of setpoint spring L [mbar] Blower pressure p L or compressed air e.g. spring No. 6 (yellow) bar 1 p L [mbar] ϒ 3 V [m /h] V [m 3/h] Connection for external gas pulse. Internal pulse must be closed. 3 Pressure connection in inlet section G 1/4 ISO 8 screw plug, Rp 3/8 to Rp with bypass cover prepared for mounting adjustable bypass restriction. 3 Option FRNG V

58 Application of proportional pressure regulator (standard design) As proportional pressure regulator for gas-air ratio regulators with fixed efficiency pressure p ratio V = 1:1 on gas equipment operated [mbar] with differential pressure. The offset range of the counterspring can be set by the setpoint spring. The +5 moving parts are compensated by the force due to weight. Gas supply or air supply are adjustable at full load and partial load. Basic load is adjustable +1 via bypass restrictor. The command variable can be up to mbar. Pressure Vacuum V min. = V max. -3x 0,05 For V max, see volumetric flow pressure drop characteristic. Blower Resulting output pressure 1 M Air Valve KH GF DMV FRNG 3 Option FRNG M Pulse 5 ϒ56 Vmax. Setting range p -3 mbar +5 mbar Adjustable bypass restrictor FRNG V1 + P L P L P Air filter Industrial burner ϒ 3 V [m /h] p [mbar] Blower 100 % 95 % Compressed air regulator 1 : 1 Pulse Regulator output Offset range for regulator characteristic 0,95 : 1 Actual pressure ratio KH GF DMV FRNG P Burner Blower pressure p L p L [mbar] p [mbar] Sequential variable Regulator output pressure p Command variable Blower pressure p L or compressed air Pretension of setpoint spring e.g. spring No. 6 (yellow) bar p L [mbar] 6 8

59 Volumetric flow pressure difference characteristic Bypass restrictor Recommended operating range 30 p [mbar] Bypass restrictor adjustable for FRNG 503 FRNG 505 FRNG 507 FRNG 510 FRNG 515 FRNG 50 Order-No Basis + 15 C, 1013 mbar, trocken Based on + 15 C, 1013 mbar, dry Base + 15 C, 1013 mbar, sec Base + 15 C, 1013 mbar, secco 0,1 0, 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0, Vn [m 3/h] Luft / Air / Aria dv = 1,00 0, 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0, Vn [m 3/h] Erdgas/Natural gas/gaz Naturel/Gas metano dv = 0,65 7 8

60 Pressure regulator FRNG Zero pressure regulator Proportional pressure regulator Compressed air-controlled pressure regulator Volumetric flow pressure loss characteristic Rp 3/8 Rp 1/ Rp 3/4 Rp 1 DN 40, Rp 1 1/ DN 50, Rp DN 65 DN 80 DN 100 DN 15 DN Recommended operating range 30 0 p [mbar] ,0 Basis + 15 C, 1013 mbar, trocken Based on + 15 C, 1013 mbar, dry Base + 15 C, 1013 mbar, sec Base + 15 C, 1013 mbar, secco Vn [m /h] Luft / Air / Aria dv = 1, Vn [m /h] Erdgas/Natural gas/gaz Naturel/Gas metano dv = 0,65 8 8

61 Pressure regulator FRNG Zero pressure regulator Proportional pressure regulator Compressed air-controlled pressure regulator Technical description The DUNGS pressure regulator, type FRNG, has an adjustable setpoint spring and defined counterspring. The pressure regulator complies with EN 88 and DIN 3380: - Input pressures up to 50 mbar (5 kpa) for zero pressure applications - Input pressures up to 00 mbar (0 kpa) for proportional pressure applications - Bypass prepared, Rp 3/8 to Rp - Sturdy, precise and sensitive regulation of regulator output pressure - Inlet pressure compensation diaphragms - Safety diaphragms - Internal pulse for regulator output pressure as standard, external pulse connection prepared - Connection for blower pressure as standard Application The DUNGS pressure regulator, type FRNG, is suitable for gases of families 1,, 3 and other neutral gaseous media. Does not contain any non-ferrous metals, suitable for gases of up to max. 0.1 vol.% H S, dry. Approval EC type test approval as per EC Gas Appliance Directive: FRNG 5 CE-0085 AQ716 Approvals in other important gas consuming countries.

62 FRNG Spring-loaded pressure regulator with adjustable setpoint spring and defined counterspring. Internal tap of regulator output pressure, external pulse and blower pressure connections prepared. Suitable for controlling regulator output pressure via a pneumatic command variable. Specifications Nominal diameters Pipe thread as per ISO 7/1 Flange Max. operating pressure Pressure regulator Input pressure range Zero pressure regulator Proportional pressure regulator Compressed air-controlled pressure regulator Output pressure range Materials of gas-conveying parts Ambient temperature Installation position Measuring/ignition gas connections Measurement opening Bypass Pulse connection Ventilation line / pressure connection for blower pressure Blower pressure command variable DN Rp 3/8 1/ 3/4 1 11/ Connection flange per DIN EN up to 500 mbar (50 kpa) Pressure regulator as per EN 88, Class A, Group, DIN 3380 RG 10, EN to 50 mbar (0.5 to 5 kpa) 5 to 00 mbar (0.5 to 0 kpa) to 500 mbar (50 kpa) Zero pressure regulator - 3 to 5 mbar (-0.3 to 0.5 kpa) Proportional pressure regulator -10 to 150 mbar (-1 to 15 kpa) Pressure with compressed air up to max. 350 mbar (35 kpa). Housing: aluminium, steel, no non-ferrous metals Seals and diaphragms: NBR 15 C to +70 C Regulator dome from vertically upright to lying horizontally Rp 1/ - DN 100 Regulator dome in vertical position DN 15, DN 150 G 1/4 ISO 8 on both sides in inlet section G 1/8 ISO 8 in the baseplate (option DN 15, DN 150) Reclosable opening for setting system-specific valuas when the system is put into operation, e. g. gas motor Bypass prepared: Rp 3/8 to Rp on right of housing Internal in outlet section, externally prepared on housing: Rp 3/8 to Rp 1 left, G 1/8; on both sides from Rp 1 1/, DN 40 G 1/4; internal pulse lockable Ventilation line needs no routing, use existing connection as pressure connection for command variable (blower pressure). Connection: G 1/4 to Rp 1; from Rp 1 1/, DN 40: G 1/ For proportional pressure applications and gas-air ratio applications at pressure ratio of approx. 1:1 and in compressed-air controlled operation: p max = 150 mbar (15 kpa) 8

63 Spring selection The output pressure is provided by the force of the installed adjustable spring, the counterspring and the the blower pressure applied. The pressure regulator is equipped with the brown spring No. 1 as standard. By exchanging the adjustable spring, it is possible to achieve larger positive zero point shifts (offsets) of the output pressure (refer to Fig. Compressed air-controlled pressure regulator). Setpoint spring range [mbar] Spring colour Nominal diameter Rp/DN Rp 3/8, Rp 1/ Rp 3/4 Rp 1 Rp 1 1/, DN 40 Rp, DN 50 DN 65, 80 DN 100 DN 15 DN Spring 1 brown Standard Spring white Spring 3 orange Spring 4 blue 5 55 Spring 5 red Spring 6 yellow Spring 7 black Spring 8 pink Spring to 9 for compressed air applications only Spring 9 grey Standard Offset 5 mbar (Closing force of counterspring in closed position) Dimensions b b e e c g g d h DN d h V1 DN + c a f a Type Order No. p max. [mbar] Rp / DN Dimensions [mm] a b c d e f g h Weight [kg] FRNG 503 FRNG 505 FRNG 507 FRNG 510 FRNG 515 FRNG Rp 3/8 Rp 1/ Rp 3/4 Rp 1 Rp 1 1/ Rp G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/ G 1/ G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/8 G 1/8 G 1/8 G 1/8 G 1/4 G 1/ FRNG 5040 FRNG 5050 FRNG 5065 FRNG 5080 FRNG 5100 FRNG 515 FRNG DN 40 DN 50 DN 65 DN 80 DN 100 DN 15 DN G 1/ G 1/ G 1/ G 1/ G 1/ G 1/ G 1/ G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/ Bypass restrictor Rp 3/8 - Rp 5 56

64 Functional description Functions according to the force comparison principle between the force of: - the adjustable setpoint spring - the defined counterspring - the differential pressure at the working diaphragm and - the force due to weight of the moving parts The counterspring acts against the adjustable spring and the weight due to force of the moving parts. Depending on the pretension of the adjustable spring and the installation position, the force of the counterspring is compensated. Overcompensation leads to positive regulator output pressures, partial compensation leads to negative regulator output pressures. Instructions Gas-conveying lines, pulse and connection lines must be made of steel and at least PN 1, DN 6. The lines must be resistant to thermal, chemical and mechanical loads. The lines must be durable and deformation- and crackproof. Do not route condensate from lines into the pressure regulator. Do not apply burning gas or combustion gas air mixtures to the installation chamber of the adjustable spring. FRNG 515 sectional drawing Pressure regulator in closed position p 1 p Housing Regulating cup 3 Pulse tap, internal 4 Compensation diaphragm 5 External pulse 6 Diaphragm disk 7 Working diaphragm 8 Safety diaphragm 9 Breathing plug 10 Setpoint spring 11 Adjustment device 1 Counterspring 13 Option DN 15, DN 150 Measurement opening with screw plug G 1/8 4 8

65 Application of zero pressure regulator (standard design) The FRNG regulates a gas flow proportional to the consumer vacuum for gas motors and self-intaking gas equipment. The regulator is adjusted within the setting range at the setpoint spring. V min. = V max. x 0.1 For V max, see volumetric flow pressure drop characteristic. Application with compressed aircontrolled pressure regulator (standard design) For externally controlled gas equipment. In connection with a selected setpoint spring, the regulator output pressure can be controlled depending on the blower pressure (compressed air). The command variable can be up to +150 mbar. V min. = V max. x 0.05 For V max, see volumetric flow pressure drop characteristic. Pressure taps Pulse and blower connection 1 Breathing plug or connection for ventilation line. Only route ventilation line in special cases or connection for air pulse line p [mbar] Pressure Mixer KH GF FRS DMV FRNG Gas motor KH GF FRS DMV FRNG Gas motor +5 Air filter p [mbar] -1 Blower Vacuum M Air filter Blower +5-3 Air Valve Pulse Industrial ϒ Pulse burner Vmax. Industrial KH GF DMV FRNG burner P +1 p KH GF DMV FRNG P [mbar] 100 % 95 % -1 Adjustable bypass restrictor -3 Adjustable FRNG bypass restrictor Vmax. FRNG ,95 : 1 Actual pressure ratio Pressure V acuum +1 Regulator output p [mbar] M P Blower Compressed air regulator L Blower pressure p Blower Compressed air regulator Pulse L Regulator output pressure Pulse p KH GF DMV FRNG [mbar] Sequential variable Regulator output pressure p p [mbar] Sequential variable Regulator output pressure p Resulting output pressure M Air Valve M Offset range for KH GF DMV regulator FRNG characteristic P P L Resulting output pressure 1 : 1 P P L P L Burner Mixer Offset range 100 for % regulator 95 % characteristic Control air 1 : 1 Blower pressure p L Command variable 1 Blower pressure p L 0 +1 or compressed air Burner Setting range p -3 mbar +5 mbar Setting range p -3 mbar +5 mbar 0,95 : 1 p Actual pressure ratio L [mbar] p L [mbar] Pretension of setpoint spring e.g. spring No. 6 (yellow) bar Command variable p Pretension of setpoint spring L [mbar] Blower pressure p L or compressed air e.g. spring No. 6 (yellow) bar 1 p L [mbar] ϒ 3 V [m /h] V [m 3/h] Connection for external gas pulse. Internal pulse must be closed. 3 Pressure connection in inlet section G 1/4 ISO 8 screw plug, Rp 3/8 to Rp with bypass cover prepared for mounting adjustable bypass restriction. 3 Option FRNG V

66 Application of proportional pressure regulator (standard design) As proportional pressure regulator for gas-air ratio regulators with fixed efficiency pressure p ratio V = 1:1 on gas equipment operated [mbar] with differential pressure. The offset range of the counterspring can be set by the setpoint spring. The +5 moving parts are compensated by the force due to weight. Gas supply or air supply are adjustable at full load and partial load. Basic load is adjustable +1 via bypass restrictor. The command variable can be up to mbar. Pressure Vacuum V min. = V max. -3x 0,05 For V max, see volumetric flow pressure drop characteristic. Blower Resulting output pressure 1 M Air Valve KH GF DMV FRNG 3 Option FRNG M Pulse 5 ϒ56 Vmax. Setting range p -3 mbar +5 mbar Adjustable bypass restrictor FRNG V1 + P L P L P Air filter Industrial burner ϒ 3 V [m /h] p [mbar] Blower 100 % 95 % Compressed air regulator 1 : 1 Pulse Regulator output Offset range for regulator characteristic 0,95 : 1 Actual pressure ratio KH GF DMV FRNG P Burner Blower pressure p L p L [mbar] p [mbar] Sequential variable Regulator output pressure p Command variable Blower pressure p L or compressed air Pretension of setpoint spring e.g. spring No. 6 (yellow) bar p L [mbar] 6 8

67 Volumetric flow pressure difference characteristic Bypass restrictor Recommended operating range 30 p [mbar] Bypass restrictor adjustable for FRNG 503 FRNG 505 FRNG 507 FRNG 510 FRNG 515 FRNG 50 Order-No Basis + 15 C, 1013 mbar, trocken Based on + 15 C, 1013 mbar, dry Base + 15 C, 1013 mbar, sec Base + 15 C, 1013 mbar, secco 0,1 0, 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0, Vn [m 3/h] Luft / Air / Aria dv = 1,00 0, 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0, Vn [m 3/h] Erdgas/Natural gas/gaz Naturel/Gas metano dv = 0,65 7 8

68 Pressure regulator FRNG Zero pressure regulator Proportional pressure regulator Compressed air-controlled pressure regulator Volumetric flow pressure loss characteristic Rp 3/8 Rp 1/ Rp 3/4 Rp 1 DN 40, Rp 1 1/ DN 50, Rp DN 65 DN 80 DN 100 DN 15 DN Recommended operating range 30 0 p [mbar] ,0 Basis + 15 C, 1013 mbar, trocken Based on + 15 C, 1013 mbar, dry Base + 15 C, 1013 mbar, sec Base + 15 C, 1013 mbar, secco Vn [m /h] Luft / Air / Aria dv = 1, Vn [m /h] Erdgas/Natural gas/gaz Naturel/Gas metano dv = 0,65 8 8

69 Safety pressure relief FRSBV 4.15 Technical description The DUNGS safety pressure relief valve, type FRSBV, is a spring-loaded safety blow-off device (SBV) with an adjustable response pressure. The safety blow-off valve corresponds to DIN Inlet pressures up to 1.0 bar (100 kpa) - Large flow rate - Safety diaphragms - Internal sensor for response pressure as standard - Threaded connection Rp 1 Application Safety pressure relief valve for gas burners and gas equipment. Suitable for gases of gas families 1,, 3 and other neutral gaseous media. Free of non-ferrous metals, suitable for gases up to max. 0.1 vol.% H S, dry. Approval EC type test approval as per EC Gas Appliance Directive: FRSBV CE-0085 AS0461 EC type test approval as per EC Pressure Equipment Directive: FRSBV CE0036 Approvals in other important gas consuming countries. 1 4

70 Sicherung eingebaut, auswechselbar Fuse built into housing, exchangeable Fusibile integré dans la couvercle du boîtier interchangeable p1 p FRSBV Spring-loaded safety blow-off device with adjustable reference-value spring, internal tap of response pressure. Specifications Nominal diameters Pipe thread as per ISO 7/1 Max. operating pressure Safety pressure relief valve Inlet pressure range Setting range, response pressure Materials of gas-conveying parts Ambient temperature Installation position Test connections Pulse connection Vent line DN 5 Rp 1 up to 1.0 bar (100 kpa) Safety blow-off valve as per DIN 3381 up to 1.0 bar (100 kpa) 0 mbar ( kpa) up to 1000 mbar (100 kpa) depending on the adjustable reference value spring Housing: Aluminium, steel Seals and diaphragms: NBR -15 C to +70 C Spring mandrel from horizontally lying to vertically standing G 1/4 ISO 8 on both sides in inlet range Internally in inlet range Vent line only necessary in special cases since safety diaphragms are installed. Connection: G 1/4 ISO 8 FRSBV application, example p 1 M R GW FRSBV Typ/Type/Type/Tipo T 6,3 L 50 V Betriebsanleitung beachten! Please comply with the operating instructions! Suivre les instructions de la notice d'utilisation! Seguire le istruzioni! p Control line KH Ball valve GF Gas filter M Manometer R Gas pressure regulator SAV Safety slam-shut valve GW Gas pressure switch FRSBV Safety pressure relief valve DMV Double solenoid valve VPS Valve proving system KH GF SAV DMV VPS Selecting the spring The response pressure results from the force of the installed setting spring and the weight of the moving parts. The safety blow-off valve is equipped Reference value spring range [mbar] Spring colour Order No Blue spring with a yellow spring as standard. By replacing the reference value spring you can set other response pressures Yellow spring Standard Grey spring Do not route condensate from lines into safety blowoff valve. Protect the safety blow-off valve from contamination by using a proper dirt trap. Do not apply burnable gas or burnable gas air mixtures to the installation space of the setting spring. 4

71 Dimensions Pressure taps b 1. Vent plug G 1/4 ISO 8 e e 1. Sealing plug G 1/4 ISO 8 in inlet range on both sides d DN g c a f Type Order No. P max. Rp/DN [bar] Dimensions [mm] a b c d e f g Weight [kg] FRSBV Rp G 1/4 G 1/ ,0 Sectional drawing of FRSBV 1010 Safety pressure relief valve in closed position Housing Spindle 3 Sealing ring 4 Control disk 5 Intermediate disk 6 Operating diaphragms 7 Safety diaphragms 8 Diaphragm disk 9 Reference value spring 10 Cover 11 Adjuster 1 Protective cap 13 Vent plug p 1 p 1 3 4

72 Safety pressure relief valve FRSBV Flow diagram, mechanically open Rp p [mbar] ,0 Basis + 15 C, 1013 mbar, trocken Based on + 15 C, 1013 mbar, dry Base + 15 C, 1013 mbar, sec Base + 15 C, 1013 mbar, secco Vn [m 3 /h] Luft / Air / Aria dv = 1, Vn [m 3 /h] Erdgas/Natural gas/gaz Naturel/Gas metano dv = 0,65 V verwendetes Gas/gas used/ gaz utilisé/gas utilizzato = V Luft/air/air/aria x f Gasart Type of gas Type de gaz Tipo di gas Dichte Density Densité Densità [kg/m 3 ] dv f f = Dichte Luft Spec. weight air poids spécifique de l'air peso specifico aria Dichte des verwendeten Gases Spec. weight of gas used poids spécifique du gaz utilisé peso specifico del gas utilizzato Erdgas/nat.Gas/ Gaz naturel/gas metano Stadtgas/City gas/ Gaz de ville/gas città Flüssiggas/LPG/ Gaz liquide/gas liquido Luft/Air/ Air/Aria We reserve the right to make any changes in the interest of technical progress. 4 4

73 Gas and air filter GF/1: Rp 1/ - Rp GF/3: DN 40 GF/4: DN 50 - DN 100 GF: DN 15 - DN Technical description Filter for interior gas lines as per DIN 3386 with high dust storage capacity. GF/1: Threaded connection as per ISO 7/1. GF/3, GF/4 and GF: Flange connection as per DIN EN Max. flow velocity: 0 m/s. Installation option for pressure measurement point for filter monitoring. Application Type GF/1, GF/3, GF/4 and GF gas and air filter for protecting downstream fittings. Filter suitable for gases of families 1,,3 and other neutral gaseous media. Approvals EC type test approval as per EC Gas Appliance Directive: GF.../1 CE-0085 AQ011 GF.../3, GF.../4 CE-0085 AQ717 GF CE-0085 AQ717 EC type test approval as per EC Pressure Equipment Directive: GF CE0085 Approvals in other important gas consuming countries. 1 8

74 Specifications - Threaded version Nominal diameter DN 15 DN 0 DN 5 DN 40 DN 50 Rp 1/ Rp 3/4 Rp 1 Rp 1 1/ Rp as per ISO 7/1 Max. operating pressure Max. flow velocity GF 5.../1 GF 40.../1 0 m/s 0.5 bar (50 kpa) 4.0 bar (400 kpa) Ambient temperature Pore width of filter element Measuring/ignition gas connection -15 C to +80 C 50 µm GF 5 /1: G 1/4 screw connection as per DIN ISO 8 upstream and downstream of filter element, on housing cover GF 40 /1: G 1/4 screw plugs as per DIN ISO 8 upstream and downstream of filter element, on housing cover Materials PageNo Seals Random laid nonwoven fabric Filter holder aluminium cast NBR PP, PE POM Installation position Any, preferred position: with cap vertical Functional description Filter designed for installation in interior gas lines and compressed air lines to protect downstream fittings. Filter element made of random laid nonwoven polypropylene fabric and metal support frame with pore width of 50 µm. Dust, chips and rust as well as other physical gas-accompanying materials and fouling are retained using the random laid nonwoven fabric. If the dust storage capacity is exceeded or if there is an excessive pressure difference, the filter loses its protective function. Installation Refer to gas flow direction indicated by arrow on filter housing. Provide sufficient space for changing the filter element. If the filter cap is mounted in vertical position, it is easier to clean the filter housing. After installation, perform leak test. Avoid direct contact between hardening masonry, concrete walls, floors and filter. Change filter element - At least once a year - If pressure difference has increased by 100 % compared to new filter - When pressure difference exceeds 50 mbar Filter monitoring GF 5 /1: The G 1/4 screw plugs can be replaced by suitable screw connections. Connect an gas differential pressure switch to monitor the pressure difference. Gas filter with differential pressure switch A G 1/4 screw connection only GF 5 /1 B Differential pressure switch for gas B A + A 8

75 Dimensions (mm) - Threaded version h Space requirement for changing filter element Type Order No. Max. operating pressure [bar] connection Rp Design Dimensions [mm] a b c d h Weight [kg] GF 505/ Rp 1/ MS GF 507/ Rp 3/4 MS GF 510/ Rp 1 MS GF 515/ RP 1 1/ MS GF 50/ Rp MS GF 4005/ Rp 1/ VS GF 4007/ Rp 3/4 VS GF 4010/ Rp 1 VS GF 4015/ Rp 1 1/ VS GF 400/ Rp VS MS = screw connection VS = screw plug 3 8

76 Specifications - Flanged version Nominal flange size Max. operating pressure Max. flow velocity Ambient temperature Pore width of filter element Measuring gas connection DN 40 DN 50 DN 65 DN 80 DN 100 DN 15 DN 150 DN 00 Flange connection as per DIN EN bar (400 kpa) 0 m/s -15 C to +80 C 50 µm G1/4 screw plugs as per DIN ISO 8 upstream and downstream of filter element, on left of housing Materials PageNo Seals Random laid nonwoven fabric Support frame aluminium cast NBR PP Stainless steel Installation position Functional description Filter designed for installation in interior gas lines and compressed air lines to protect downstream fittings. Filter element made of random laid nonwoven polypropylene fabric and metal support frame with pore width of 50 µm. Dust, chips and rust as well as other physical gas-accompanying materials and fouling are retained by the random laid nonwoven fabric. If the dust storage capacity is exceeded or if there is an excessive pressure difference, the filter loses its protective function. GF.../3, GF.../4 gas filter section Any, preferred position: with cap vertical Installation Refer to gas flow direction indicated by arrow on filter housing. Provide sufficient space for changing the filter element. If the filter cap is mounted in vertical position, it is easier to clean the filter housing. After installation, perform leak test. Important: Avoid direct contact between hardening masonry, concrete walls, floors and filter. Filter monitor Change filter element - At least once a year - If pressure difference has increased by 100% compared to new filter - When pressure difference exceeds 50 mbar Filter monitoring The G 1/4 screw plugs can be replaced with suitable screw connections. This permits the connection of an gas differential pressure switch to monitor pressure difference. 1 O ring Cover 3 Housing 4 Filter element A B Measurement connection Differential pressure switch for gas A A + B 4 8

77 Dimensions (mm) - Flanged version h c d b h Space requirement for changing filter element Type Order No. Max. operating pressure [bar] DN connection Dimensions [mm] a b c d h Weight [kg] GF 40040/ DN GF 40050/ DN GF 40065/ DN GF 40080/ DN GF 40100/ DN GF DN GF DN GF DN

78 Volumetric flow/pressure drop characteristic Pressure loss p [mbar] for natural gas (dv = 0,64) Operating flow rate [m 3 /h] Gas flow rate [m 3 /h] (standard flow rate) Pressure loss p [mbar] for air (dv = 1) Inlet pressure p e [bar] 6 8

79 Diagram 1 - Determining the nominal diameter - Conversion of the flow rate from standard flow rate to operating flow rate. Diagram - Determining the pressure loss ( p). Procedure Determining the filter size 1.1 Define the flow rate as a standard flow rate on the lower scale. 1. Draw a parallel reference line along the diagonal dashed line up to the actual inlet pressure. 1.3 You will find region for minimum filter size vertically above this point of intersection. You can read the corresponding flow rate from the scale above. Example Determining the filter size 1.1 Flow rate (standard flow rate),000 m 3 /h 1. Inlet pressure 4 bar 1.3 Determining the filter size: min. DN 100, Determining the flow rate: 400 m 3 /h Example Procedure Determining the pressure loss.1 Define the flow rate as a standard flow rate on the lower scale.. Draw a parallel reference line along the diagonal dashed line up to the actual inlet pressure..3 Go from this point of intersection vertically upwards to diagram. The pressure loss for gas and air can be read at the point of intersection with the characteristic curve for the previously determined filter size. The pressure loss for other gases can be estimated from the value valid for air by multiplying this value with the density ratio. Determining the pressure loss.1 Flow rate (standard flow rate),000 m 3 /h. Inlet pressure 4 bar.3 Determining the pressure loss for gas: p = 15 mbar Determining the pressure loss for air: p = 3 mbar All specified values refer to filter mats in new condition. Pressure loss p [mbar] for air (dv = 1).3 Pressure loss p [mbar] for natural gas (dv = 0,64) Inlet pressure p e [bar] /.1 Operating flow rate [m 3 /h] Gas flow rate [m 3 /h] (standard flow rate) 7 8

80 Gas and air filter GF/1: Rp 1/ - Rp GF/3: DN 40 GF/4: DN 50 - DN 100 GF: DN 15 - DN

81 Gas and air filter GF/1: Rp 1/ - Rp GF/3: DN 40 GF/4: DN 50 - DN 100 GF: DN 15 - DN Technical description Filter for interior gas lines as per DIN 3386 with high dust storage capacity. GF/1: Threaded connection as per ISO 7/1. GF/3, GF/4 and GF: Flange connection as per DIN EN Max. flow velocity: 0 m/s. Installation option for pressure measurement point for filter monitoring. Application Type GF/1, GF/3, GF/4 and GF gas and air filter for protecting downstream fittings. Filter suitable for gases of families 1,,3 and other neutral gaseous media. Approvals EC type test approval as per EC Gas Appliance Directive: GF.../1 CE-0085 AQ011 GF.../3, GF.../4 CE-0085 AQ717 GF CE-0085 AQ717 EC type test approval as per EC Pressure Equipment Directive: GF CE0085 Approvals in other important gas consuming countries. 1 8

82 Specifications - Threaded version Nominal diameter DN 15 DN 0 DN 5 DN 40 DN 50 Rp 1/ Rp 3/4 Rp 1 Rp 1 1/ Rp as per ISO 7/1 Max. operating pressure Max. flow velocity GF 5.../1 GF 40.../1 0 m/s 0.5 bar (50 kpa) 4.0 bar (400 kpa) Ambient temperature Pore width of filter element Measuring/ignition gas connection -15 C to +80 C 50 µm GF 5 /1: G 1/4 screw connection as per DIN ISO 8 upstream and downstream of filter element, on housing cover GF 40 /1: G 1/4 screw plugs as per DIN ISO 8 upstream and downstream of filter element, on housing cover Materials PageNo Seals Random laid nonwoven fabric Filter holder aluminium cast NBR PP, PE POM Installation position Any, preferred position: with cap vertical Functional description Filter designed for installation in interior gas lines and compressed air lines to protect downstream fittings. Filter element made of random laid nonwoven polypropylene fabric and metal support frame with pore width of 50 µm. Dust, chips and rust as well as other physical gas-accompanying materials and fouling are retained using the random laid nonwoven fabric. If the dust storage capacity is exceeded or if there is an excessive pressure difference, the filter loses its protective function. Installation Refer to gas flow direction indicated by arrow on filter housing. Provide sufficient space for changing the filter element. If the filter cap is mounted in vertical position, it is easier to clean the filter housing. After installation, perform leak test. Avoid direct contact between hardening masonry, concrete walls, floors and filter. Change filter element - At least once a year - If pressure difference has increased by 100 % compared to new filter - When pressure difference exceeds 50 mbar Filter monitoring GF 5 /1: The G 1/4 screw plugs can be replaced by suitable screw connections. Connect an gas differential pressure switch to monitor the pressure difference. Gas filter with differential pressure switch A G 1/4 screw connection only GF 5 /1 B Differential pressure switch for gas B A + A 8

83 Dimensions (mm) - Threaded version h Space requirement for changing filter element Type Order No. Max. operating pressure [bar] connection Rp Design Dimensions [mm] a b c d h Weight [kg] GF 505/ Rp 1/ MS GF 507/ Rp 3/4 MS GF 510/ Rp 1 MS GF 515/ RP 1 1/ MS GF 50/ Rp MS GF 4005/ Rp 1/ VS GF 4007/ Rp 3/4 VS GF 4010/ Rp 1 VS GF 4015/ Rp 1 1/ VS GF 400/ Rp VS MS = screw connection VS = screw plug 3 8

84 Specifications - Flanged version Nominal flange size Max. operating pressure Max. flow velocity Ambient temperature Pore width of filter element Measuring gas connection DN 40 DN 50 DN 65 DN 80 DN 100 DN 15 DN 150 DN 00 Flange connection as per DIN EN bar (400 kpa) 0 m/s -15 C to +80 C 50 µm G1/4 screw plugs as per DIN ISO 8 upstream and downstream of filter element, on left of housing Materials Housing Seals Random laid nonwoven fabric Support frame aluminium cast NBR PP Stainless steel Installation position Functional description Filter designed for installation in interior gas lines and compressed air lines to protect downstream fittings. Filter element made of random laid nonwoven polypropylene fabric and metal support frame with pore width of 50 µm. Dust, chips and rust as well as other physical gas-accompanying materials and fouling are retained by the random laid nonwoven fabric. If the dust storage capacity is exceeded or if there is an excessive pressure difference, the filter loses its protective function. GF.../3, GF.../4 gas filter section Any, preferred position: with cap vertical Installation Refer to gas flow direction indicated by arrow on filter housing. Provide sufficient space for changing the filter element. If the filter cap is mounted in vertical position, it is easier to clean the filter housing. After installation, perform leak test. Important: Avoid direct contact between hardening masonry, concrete walls, floors and filter. Filter monitor Change filter element - At least once a year - If pressure difference has increased by 100% compared to new filter - When pressure difference exceeds 50 mbar Filter monitoring The G 1/4 screw plugs can be replaced with suitable screw connections. This permits the connection of an gas differential pressure switch to monitor pressure difference. 1 O ring Cover 3 Housing 4 Filter element A B Measurement connection Differential pressure switch for gas A A + B 4 8

85 Dimensions (mm) - Flanged version h c d b h Space requirement for changing filter element Type Order No. Max. operating pressure [bar] DN connection Dimensions [mm] a b c d h Weight [kg] GF 40040/ DN GF 40050/ DN GF 40065/ DN GF 40080/ DN GF 40100/ DN GF DN GF DN GF DN

86 Volumetric flow/pressure drop characteristic Pressure loss p [mbar] for natural gas (dv = 0,64) Operating flow rate [m 3 /h] Gas flow rate [m 3 /h] (standard flow rate) Pressure loss p [mbar] for air (dv = 1) Inlet pressure p e [bar] 6 8

87 Diagram 1 - Determining the nominal diameter - Conversion of the flow rate from standard flow rate to operating flow rate. Diagram - Determining the pressure loss ( p). Procedure Determining the filter size 1.1 Define the flow rate as a standard flow rate on the lower scale. 1. Draw a parallel reference line along the diagonal dashed line up to the actual inlet pressure. 1.3 You will find region for minimum filter size vertically above this point of intersection. You can read the corresponding flow rate from the scale above. Example Determining the filter size 1.1 Flow rate (standard flow rate),000 m 3 /h 1. Inlet pressure 4 bar 1.3 Determining the filter size: min. DN 100, Determining the flow rate: 400 m 3 /h Example Procedure Determining the pressure loss.1 Define the flow rate as a standard flow rate on the lower scale.. Draw a parallel reference line along the diagonal dashed line up to the actual inlet pressure..3 Go from this point of intersection vertically upwards to diagram. The pressure loss for gas and air can be read at the point of intersection with the characteristic curve for the previously determined filter size. The pressure loss for other gases can be estimated from the value valid for air by multiplying this value with the density ratio. Determining the pressure loss.1 Flow rate (standard flow rate),000 m 3 /h. Inlet pressure 4 bar.3 Determining the pressure loss for gas: p = 15 mbar Determining the pressure loss for air: p = 3 mbar All specified values refer to filter mats in new condition. Pressure loss p [mbar] for air (dv = 1).3 Pressure loss p [mbar] for natural gas (dv = 0,64) Inlet pressure p e [bar] /.1 Operating flow rate [m 3 /h] Gas flow rate [m 3 /h] (standard flow rate) 7 8

88 Gas and air filter GF/1: Rp 1/ - Rp GF/3: DN 40 GF/4: DN 50 - DN 100 GF: DN 15 - DN

89 Differential pressure switches for gas, air, flue and exhaust gases GGW A4 GGW A4-U GGW A4/ GGW A4-U/ Technical description The differential pressure switch GGW A4 is an adjustable gas-differential pressure switch as per EN 1854 for automatic burner controls. It is suitable for switching a circuit on, off or over on changes in actual pressure value relative to the set reference value. The reference value (switching point) is adjusted on a setting wheel provided with a scale. The test nipple is integrated in metal housing as standard. Applications Differential pressure switch in furnace, ventilation, and air conditioning applications. Differential pressure switch: Suitable for employment with gas family 1,, 3, and other, neutral, gaseous media as well as air, smoke and exhaust gases. It does not contain any non-ferrous metals, suitable for gases of up to max. 0.1 vol % H S, dry. Certifications EC type test approval as per EC Gas Applicance Directive: GGW A4 CE-0085 AO 30 EC type test approval as per EC Pressure Equipment Directive: GGW A4 CE0036 Pressure switches class "S" as per EN Approvals in other important gas-consuming countries.

90 Function Differential pressure switch operating in the over- and under-pressure ranges. The differential pressure acts on the membrane, pressing it against the force of the adjusting spring and against the microswitch. The pressure switch operates without outside power. Differential pressure switch GGW A4 and GGW A4-U The switching apparatus reacts to the difference in pressure between the two pressure chambers [G 1/4 (+) <-> G 1/8 (-)] and, if the pressure exceeds or drops below the setpoint, activates or switches an electrical circuit. Unit selection If the lower pressure is [G 1/8 (-)] and excess pressure with respect to the atmosphere exists type GGW A4 must be employed. If the lower pressure is [G 1/8 (-)], and lower pressure with respect to the atmosphere exists type GGW A4-U must be employed. Overpressure switch GGW...A4 Pressure connection G 1/4 (+) Single-acting pressure switch in the overpressure range. The switching mechanism responds if there is an overpressure which switches on, off or over to an electric circuit if the set reference value is exceeded or undershot. The pressure connetion G 1/8 may not be closed. Low pressure switch GGW...A4-U Pressure connection G 1/8 Single-acting pressure switch in the overpressure range. The switching mechanism responds if there is a low pressure which switches on, off or over to an electric circuit if the set reference value is exceeded or undershot. The pressure connetion G 1/4 may not be closed. Switching function As pressure rises: 1 NC opens, NO closes. As pressure falls: 1 NC closes, NO opens. Definition of switching difference p The switching difference p is the pressure difference between the upper and lower switching pressures. COM 3 p 1 NO NC Pressure at meter Switching difference, p Setting tolerance Adjustment as pressure falls Upper switching pressure Rising Falling Lower switching pressure GGW A4, Design: Clear cover Protection class: IP 54 IP 54 5 Protection against ingress of solid particles ø 1 mm. Protection against access to hazardous parts using ø 1 mm wire Complete contact protection 4 Protection against a water jet. No hazardous conditions may result. GGW A4/, Design: Metal housing Protection class: IP 65 IP 65 6 Protection against the entry of dust (dust sealed). Protection against access to hazardous parts using ø 1 mm wire Complete contact protection 5 Protection against a water jet from a nozzle directed at the unit (housing) from any directions No hazardous conditions may result (water jet). 6

91 Technical specifications Max. operating pressure GGW 3 A4 GGW 3 A4/ - GGW 150 A4 500 mbar (50 kpa) - GGW 150 A4/ 500 mbar (50 kpa) GGW 3 A4-U - GGW 150 A4-U -500 mbar (-50 kpa) GGW 3 A4-U/ - GGW 150 A4-U/ -500 mbar (-50 kpa) Pressure connection Metering connection Temperature range P+: In the center of the underside of the housing, G 1/4 internal thread in accord. with ISO 8: Gas or air. P+: On the side of the housing with closure screw, G 1/4: Gas or air P-: On the side of the underside of the housing, G 1/8 internal thread in accord. with ISO 8: Gas or air. Metering connection tube integrated into the metal housing, ø 9 Ambient temperature -15 C to +70 C Medium temperature -15 C to +70 C Storage temperature -30 C to +80 C Materials GGW A4 Housing base Cover Switch portion Membrane Switch contact GGW A4/ Housing base Cover Switch portion Membrane Switch contact aluminium die casting Polycarbonate Polycarbonate NBR Ag gold-plated (Au) suitable for DDC applications: 4 VDC; 0.01 A aluminium die casting Zinc diecast, powder-coated Polycarbonate NBR Ag gold-plated (Au) suitable for DDC applications: 4 VDC; 0.01 A Switching voltage Nominal current Switching current Electrical connection DC min. 5 V max. 4 V (AC eff. min. 4 V max. 50 V) (DC min. 4 V max. 48 V) DC 0 ma (AC eff. 10 A) DC min. 5 ma max. 0 ma (AC eff. min. 0 ma max. 6 A cos ϕ 1) (AC eff. min. 0 ma max. 3 A cos ϕ 0,6) (DC min. 0 ma max. 1 A) Standard at screw terminals via cable gland, M0 x 1,5 Degree of protection Special design GGW A4 GGW A4/ plug connection for line sockets as per DIN EN , 3-pin with protection contact IP 54 in accord. with IEC 59 (EN 6059), (clear cover). IP 65 in accord. with IEC 59 (EN 6059), (metal housing). Adjustment Adjustment tolerance With rising pressure and installed in a vertical position.optional rising or dropping pressure adjustment on-site possible. Note switch point change if installation position changes. ± 15% switch point deviation based on the setpoint and with unit installed in a vertical position 3 6

92 Dimensions [mm] GGW A4 GGW A4-U GGW / A4.5 x 9 dia. deep for equipment plug as per DIN EN ,4 10,3 Integrated test nipple, ø 9 18,5 Pressure connection G 1/4 (+) 76 53,75 (LK 76 + Integrated test nipple 14.3 x.4 O ring M5 x 15 hex. screw, similar to DIN EN ISO 476 for M4 x 4. screws as per ISO 107 M5 hex. nut as per DIN EN ISO G 1/4 (+) pressure connection G 1/4 screw plug G 1/4 G 1/4 Made in Germany Screw plug G 1/4 withe sealing ring G 1/4 M0 x 1,5 or connector for line socket as per DIN EN x ø 4, for M4 screws as per ISO 107, G 1/8 (-) pressure connection G 1/8 (-) pressure connection GGW A4/ with metal housing, cable gland M 0 x ,4 10,3 66,8 Closure screw with: 1.0 slot Integrated test nipple, ø 9 4 self-aligning pan-head screws M3x slot and DIN 796-Z. Phillips head Screw plug, G 1/4, with sealing ring 77 53,75 ø 4, - 0, + Pressure connection G 114 G 1/4 38,5 Pressure connection, G 1/4 (+) Installation position Standard installation position When installed horizontally, the pressure switch switches at a pressure higher by approx. 0.5 mbar When installed horizontally overhead, the pressure switch switches at a pressure lower by approx. 0.5 mbar α When installed in an intermediate installation position, the pressure switch switches at pressure deviating from the set reference value by max. ± 0.5 mbar. 4 6

93 Designation V0 Pressure connection G 1/4 position 0 V3 Pressure connection G 1/4 position 3 VS0 VS3 screw plug at position 0 screw plug at position 3 Made in Germany MS3 Test nipple at position 3 MS9 Test nipple at position 9 M9 Test nipple, open position 9 M M0 x 1.5 cable gland (standard) G3 Device connector Ordering example Pressure switch design Differential pressure switch GGW A4 Adjustment range mbar Contact material Au Electrical connection Cable gland M0 x 1,5 Metering connection MS 9 Pressure connection G1/4 V0-VS3: at position 0 and position 3 with screw plug Au Gold plated silver 0, , GGW A4 Clear cover PC, (IP54) Differential pressure switches when the pressure exceeds or drops below the adjusted setpoint (positive pressure). GGW A4/ Metal housing powder-coated, (IP 65) Differential pressure switches when the pressure exceeds or drops below the adjusted setpoint (positive pressure). GGW A4-U Clear cover PC, (IP54) Differential pressure switches when the pressure exceeds or drops below the adjusted setpoint (negative pressure). GGW A4-U/ Metal housing powder-coated, (IP 65) Differential pressure switches when the pressure exceeds or drops below the adjusted setpoint (negative pressure). GGW 150 A4 [Au-M-MS9-V0-VS3] Accessories for pressure switch GGW A4 Kit: G3 equipment plug, 3-pin + E Line sockets, 3-pin + E grey GDMW G 1/4 test nipple and seal ring (5 x) G 1/4 screw plug and seal ring (5 x) Double pressure switch mounting kit (not for /-version) Metal mounting bracket Mounting kit glowlamp, 30 V yellow Mounting kit glowlamp, 10 V yellow Mounting kit display-led, 4 V yellow Mounting kit glowlamp, 30 V green Mounting kit display-led, 4 V green Order No

94 Differential pressure switches for gas, air, flue and exhaust gases GGW A4 GGW A4-U GGW A4/ GGW A4-U/ Technical data 1 mbar = 100 Pa = 0,1 kpa 10 mm WS 1 Pa = 0,01 mbar 0,1 mm WS Model Version [Au-M-MS9-V0-VS3] Order number Setting range [mbar] Degree of protection Differential pressure switch p [mbar] GGW A4 Differential pressure switch (positive pressure) GGW 3 A4 GGW 10 A4 GGW 50 A4 GGW 150 A , , IP 54 IP 54 IP 54 IP 54 0,3 0,5 1 3 GGW A4-U Differential pressure switch (negative pressure) GGW 3 A4-U GGW 10 A4-U GGW 50 A4-U GGW 150 A4-U , , IP 54 IP 54 IP 54 IP 54 0,3 0,5 1 3 Supplied in separate packaging Model Version [Au-M-MS9-V0-VS3] Order number Setting range [mbar] Degree of protection Differential pressure switch p [mbar] GGW A4/ Differential pressure switch (positive pressure) GGW 3 A4/ GGW 10 A4/ GGW 50 A4/ GGW 150 A4/ , , IP 65 IP 65 IP 65 IP 65 0,3 0,5 1 3 GGW A4-U/ Differential pressure switch (negative pressure) GGW 3 A4-U/ GGW 10 A4-U/ GGW 50 A4-U/ GGW 150 A4-U/ , , IP 65 IP 65 IP 65 IP 65 0,3 0,5 1 3 Supplied in separate packaging 6 6

95 Differential pressure switches for gas, air, flue and exhaust gases GGW A4 GGW A4-U GGW A4/ GGW A4-U/ Technical description The differential pressure switch GGW A4 is an adjustable gas-differential pressure switch as per EN 1854 for automatic burner controls. It is suitable for switching a circuit on, off or over on changes in actual pressure value relative to the set reference value. The reference value (switching point) is adjusted on a setting wheel provided with a scale. The test nipple is integrated in metal housing as standard. Applications Differential pressure switch in furnace, ventilation, and air conditioning applications. Differential pressure switch: Suitable for employment with gas family 1,, 3, and other, neutral, gaseous media as well as air, smoke and exhaust gases. It does not contain any non-ferrous metals, suitable for gases of up to max. 0.1 vol % H S, dry. Certifications EC type test approval as per EC Gas Applicance Directive: GGW A4 CE-0085 AO 30 EC type test approval as per EC Pressure Equipment Directive: GGW A4 CE0036 Pressure switches class "S" as per EN Approvals in other important gas-consuming countries.

96 Function Differential pressure switch operating in the over- and under-pressure ranges. The differential pressure acts on the membrane, pressing it against the force of the adjusting spring and against the microswitch. The pressure switch operates without outside power. Differential pressure switch GGW A4 and GGW A4-U The switching apparatus reacts to the difference in pressure between the two pressure chambers [G 1/4 (+) <-> G 1/8 (-)] and, if the pressure exceeds or drops below the setpoint, activates or switches an electrical circuit. Unit selection If the lower pressure is [G 1/8 (-)] and excess pressure with respect to the atmosphere exists type GGW A4 must be employed. If the lower pressure is [G 1/8 (-)], and lower pressure with respect to the atmosphere exists type GGW A4-U must be employed. Overpressure switch GGW...A4 Pressure connection G 1/4 (+) Single-acting pressure switch in the overpressure range. The switching mechanism responds if there is an overpressure which switches on, off or over to an electric circuit if the set reference value is exceeded or undershot. The pressure connetion G 1/8 may not be closed. Low pressure switch GGW...A4-U Pressure connection G 1/8 Single-acting pressure switch in the overpressure range. The switching mechanism responds if there is a low pressure which switches on, off or over to an electric circuit if the set reference value is exceeded or undershot. The pressure connetion G 1/4 may not be closed. Switching function As pressure rises: 1 NC opens, NO closes. As pressure falls: 1 NC closes, NO opens. Definition of switching difference p The switching difference p is the pressure difference between the upper and lower switching pressures. COM 3 p 1 NO NC Pressure at meter Switching difference, p Setting tolerance Adjustment as pressure falls Upper switching pressure Rising Falling Lower switching pressure GGW A4, Design: Clear cover Protection class: IP 54 IP 54 5 Protection against ingress of solid particles ø 1 mm. Protection against access to hazardous parts using ø 1 mm wire Complete contact protection 4 Protection against a water jet. No hazardous conditions may result. GGW A4/, Design: Metal housing Protection class: IP 65 IP 65 6 Protection against the entry of dust (dust sealed). Protection against access to hazardous parts using ø 1 mm wire Complete contact protection 5 Protection against a water jet from a nozzle directed at the unit (housing) from any directions No hazardous conditions may result (water jet). 6

97 Technical specifications Max. operating pressure GGW 3 A4 GGW 3 A4/ - GGW 150 A4 500 mbar (50 kpa) - GGW 150 A4/ 500 mbar (50 kpa) GGW 3 A4-U - GGW 150 A4-U -500 mbar (-50 kpa) GGW 3 A4-U/ - GGW 150 A4-U/ -500 mbar (-50 kpa) Pressure connection Metering connection Temperature range P+: In the center of the underside of the housing, G 1/4 internal thread in accord. with ISO 8: Gas or air. P+: On the side of the housing with closure screw, G 1/4: Gas or air P-: On the side of the underside of the housing, G 1/8 internal thread in accord. with ISO 8: Gas or air. Metering connection tube integrated into the metal housing, ø 9 Ambient temperature -15 C to +70 C Medium temperature -15 C to +70 C Storage temperature -30 C to +80 C Materials GGW A4 Housing base Cover Switch portion Membrane Switch contact GGW A4/ Housing base Cover Switch portion Membrane Switch contact aluminium die casting Polycarbonate Polycarbonate NBR Ag gold-plated (Au) suitable for DDC applications: 4 VDC; 0.01 A aluminium die casting Zinc diecast, powder-coated Polycarbonate NBR Ag gold-plated (Au) suitable for DDC applications: 4 VDC; 0.01 A Switching voltage Nominal current Switching current Electrical connection DC min. 5 V max. 4 V (AC eff. min. 4 V max. 50 V) (DC min. 4 V max. 48 V) DC 0 ma (AC eff. 10 A) DC min. 5 ma max. 0 ma (AC eff. min. 0 ma max. 6 A cos ϕ 1) (AC eff. min. 0 ma max. 3 A cos ϕ 0,6) (DC min. 0 ma max. 1 A) Standard at screw terminals via cable gland, M0 x 1,5 Degree of protection Special design GGW A4 GGW A4/ plug connection for line sockets as per DIN EN , 3-pin with protection contact IP 54 in accord. with IEC 59 (EN 6059), (clear cover). IP 65 in accord. with IEC 59 (EN 6059), (metal housing). Adjustment Adjustment tolerance With rising pressure and installed in a vertical position.optional rising or dropping pressure adjustment on-site possible. Note switch point change if installation position changes. ± 15% switch point deviation based on the setpoint and with unit installed in a vertical position 3 6

98 Dimensions [mm] GGW A4 GGW A4-U GGW / A4.5 x 9 dia. deep for equipment plug as per DIN EN ,4 10,3 Integrated test nipple, ø 9 18,5 Pressure connection G 1/4 (+) 76 53,75 (LK 76 + Integrated test nipple 14.3 x.4 O ring M5 x 15 hex. screw, similar to DIN EN ISO 476 for M4 x 4. screws as per ISO 107 M5 hex. nut as per DIN EN ISO G 1/4 (+) pressure connection G 1/4 screw plug G 1/4 G 1/4 Made in Germany Screw plug G 1/4 withe sealing ring G 1/4 M0 x 1,5 or connector for line socket as per DIN EN x ø 4, for M4 screws as per ISO 107, G 1/8 (-) pressure connection G 1/8 (-) pressure connection GGW A4/ with metal housing, cable gland M 0 x ,4 10,3 66,8 Closure screw with: 1.0 slot Integrated test nipple, ø 9 4 self-aligning pan-head screws M3x slot and DIN 796-Z. Phillips head Screw plug, G 1/4, with sealing ring 77 53,75 ø 4, - 0, + Pressure connection G 114 G 1/4 38,5 Pressure connection, G 1/4 (+) Installation position Standard installation position When installed horizontally, the pressure switch switches at a pressure higher by approx. 0.5 mbar When installed horizontally overhead, the pressure switch switches at a pressure lower by approx. 0.5 mbar α When installed in an intermediate installation position, the pressure switch switches at pressure deviating from the set reference value by max. ± 0.5 mbar. 4 6

99 Designation V0 Pressure connection G 1/4 position 0 V3 Pressure connection G 1/4 position 3 VS0 VS3 screw plug at position 0 screw plug at position 3 Made in Germany MS3 Test nipple at position 3 MS9 Test nipple at position 9 M9 Test nipple, open position 9 M M0 x 1.5 cable gland (standard) G3 Device connector Ordering example Pressure switch design Differential pressure switch GGW A4 Adjustment range mbar Contact material Au Electrical connection Cable gland M0 x 1,5 Metering connection MS 9 Pressure connection G1/4 V0-VS3: at position 0 and position 3 with screw plug Au Gold plated silver 0, , GGW A4 Clear cover PC, (IP54) Differential pressure switches when the pressure exceeds or drops below the adjusted setpoint (positive pressure). GGW A4/ Metal housing powder-coated, (IP 65) Differential pressure switches when the pressure exceeds or drops below the adjusted setpoint (positive pressure). GGW A4-U Clear cover PC, (IP54) Differential pressure switches when the pressure exceeds or drops below the adjusted setpoint (negative pressure). GGW A4-U/ Metal housing powder-coated, (IP 65) Differential pressure switches when the pressure exceeds or drops below the adjusted setpoint (negative pressure). GGW 150 A4 [Au-M-MS9-V0-VS3] Accessories for pressure switch GGW A4 Kit: G3 equipment plug, 3-pin + E Line sockets, 3-pin + E grey GDMW G 1/4 test nipple and seal ring (5 x) G 1/4 screw plug and seal ring (5 x) Double pressure switch mounting kit (not for /-version) Metal mounting bracket Mounting kit glowlamp, 30 V yellow Mounting kit glowlamp, 10 V yellow Mounting kit display-led, 4 V yellow Mounting kit glowlamp, 30 V green Mounting kit display-led, 4 V green Order No

100 Differential pressure switches for gas, air, flue and exhaust gases GGW A4 GGW A4-U GGW A4/ GGW A4-U/ Technical data 1 mbar = 100 Pa = 0,1 kpa 10 mm WS 1 Pa = 0,01 mbar 0,1 mm WS Model Version [Au-M-MS9-V0-VS3] Order number Setting range [mbar] Degree of protection Differential pressure switch p [mbar] GGW A4 Differential pressure switch (positive pressure) GGW 3 A4 GGW 10 A4 GGW 50 A4 GGW 150 A , , IP 54 IP 54 IP 54 IP 54 0,3 0,5 1 3 GGW A4-U Differential pressure switch (negative pressure) GGW 3 A4-U GGW 10 A4-U GGW 50 A4-U GGW 150 A4-U , , IP 54 IP 54 IP 54 IP 54 0,3 0,5 1 3 Supplied in separate packaging Model Version [Au-M-MS9-V0-VS3] Order number Setting range [mbar] Degree of protection Differential pressure switch p [mbar] GGW A4/ Differential pressure switch (positive pressure) GGW 3 A4/ GGW 10 A4/ GGW 50 A4/ GGW 150 A4/ , , IP 65 IP 65 IP 65 IP 65 0,3 0,5 1 3 GGW A4-U/ Differential pressure switch (negative pressure) GGW 3 A4-U/ GGW 10 A4-U/ GGW 50 A4-U/ GGW 150 A4-U/ , , IP 65 IP 65 IP 65 IP 65 0,3 0,5 1 3 Supplied in separate packaging 6 6

101 High-pressure switch for gas, air, flue gases and combustion products GW A4 HP GW A4/ HP Technical description The GW A4 HP pressure switch is an adjustable pressure switch as per EN 1854 (GW 6000 A4 as per DIN 3398T3) for burners. It is suitable for closing, opening or switching over a current circuit when the actual pressure value deviates from the specified pressure setpoint. The specified pressure setpoint (operating point) is set at a setting wheel using a scale. Application Pressure monitoring in burner control systems Suitable for gases of gas families 1,,3 and other neutral gaseous media, as well as air, flue gases and combustion products. Approvals EU type test approval as per EC Gas Appliance Directive: GW A4... CE-0085 AO 30 EU type test approval as per EC Pressure Equipment Directive: GW A4... CE0036 Approvals in other important gasconsuming countries.

102 Functional Pressure switch for applications involving excess pressure. GW A4 HP The pressure counteracts the force of the setting spring on the micro-switch via the metal bellows. The pressure switch does not require power assistance. Pressure switch GW A4 HP The switching mechanism reacts to overpressure and closes, opens or switches over a current circuit when the specified pressure setpoint is overshot or undershot. All gas-carrying parts are made of stainless steel and, therefore, are suitable for: - applications involving operating pressures greater than 600 mbar - aggressive media such as sulphuric acid up to a concentration of 1.0 % by vol., humid - fluids (on request) Switching function As pressure rises: 1 NC opens, NO closes. As pressure falls: 1 NC closes, NO opens. Definition of switching difference p The switching difference p is the pressure difference between the upper and lower switching pressures. COM 3 p 1 NO NC Pressure at meter Switching difference, p Setting tolerance Adjustment as pressure falls Upper switching pressure Rising Falling Lower switching pressure COM 3 COM 3 p p 1 N 1 N NO GW A4, Design: Clear cover Degree of protection IP 54 IP 54 NC 5 Protection against ingress of solid particles ø 1 mm Protection against access to hazardous parts with a wire, ø 1 mm Complete contact protection 4 Protection against a water jet. No hazardous conditions may result. NO GW A4, Design: Metal housing Degree of protection IP 65 IP 65 NC 6 Protection against the entry of dust (dust sealed). Protection against access to hazardous parts with a wire, ø 1 mm Complete contact protection 5 Protection against a water jet from a nozzle directed at the unit (housing) from any directions No hazardous conditions may result (water jet). 6

103 Specifications Max. operating pressure GW 500 A4 HP p max = bar setting range bar p max = 5 bar setting range bar Pressure connection GW 000 A4 HP p max = 5 bar (gas) GW 6000 A4 HP p max = 8 bar (gas) p+: centrally on underside of housing, G 1/4 internal thread to ISO 8: Gas or air Temperature range Ambient temperature -15 C to +70 C Medium temperature -15 C to +70 C Storage temperature -30 C to +80 C Materials GW A4 HP Housing lower section Switch Switching contact Metal bellows Hood GW A4/ HP Hood aluminium die casting polycarbonate standard: silver gold-plated (Au), suitable for DDCapplications: DC 4 V; 0,0 A (stainless steel) polycarbonate die cast zinc, powder coated Switching voltage AC eff. min. 4 V max. 50 V DC min. 4 V max. 48 V DDC application: DC min. 5 V max. 4 V Nominal current AC eff. 10 A DDC application: DC max. 0 ma Switching current AC eff. min. 0 ma max. 6 A with cos ϕ 1 AC eff. max. 3 A with cos ϕ 0,6 DC min. 0 ma max. 1 A DDC application: DC min. 5 ma max. 0 ma Electrical connection Standard at screw terminals via cable gland, M0x1.5 Special version plug connection for line sockets as pert DIN EN , 3-pin with protection contact Degree of protection GW A4 HP IP 54 to IEC 59 (EN 6059), (clear hood) GW A4/ HP IP 65 to IEC 59 (EN 6059), (metal housing) Adjustment Setting tolerance With rising pressure and installed in a vertical position. Optional rising or dropping pressure adjustment on-site possible. Note switch point change if installation position changes.. ±15% switch point deviation based on the setpoint and with unit installed in a vertical position 3 6

104 Dimensions [mm] GW A4 HP.5 x 9 dia. deep for equipment plug as per DINEN , 18,5 G 1/4 pressure connection 76 53,75 (LK 76) + SW 1 4 X Ø 4, Made in Germany M0 x 1.5 or plug-type connection for cable socket according to DIN EN GW A4/ HP IP 65 with metal housing, cable gland M 0 x 1.5 GW A4/ HP IP 65 with metal housing, plug-in connection for sockets in according to DIN EN self-tapping cylinder bolts M3x14 slot 0.8 and cross slot to DIN 796-Z 77 53,75 ø 4, - 0, G 1/4 38,5 38, 67, , ,6 SW 1 SW 1 4 self-tapping cylinder bolts M3x14 slot 0.8 and cross slot to DIN 796-Z 77 53,75 ø 4, - 0, + G 1/4 38,5 G 1/4 7 G 1/4 pressure connection gas or air G 1/4 pressure connection gas or air SW = Wrench width Installation position α Standard installation position; if a different installation position is used, pay attention to the changed operating points: GW 500 A4 HP ca. ± 10 mbar GW 000 A4 HP ca. ± 0 mbar GW 6000 A4 HP ca. ± 80 mbar α When installed horizontally, the pressure switch switches at a pressure higher α When installed horizontally overhead, the pressure switch switches at a pressure lowe α When installed at an intermediate position, the pressure switch responds if there is maximum upper or lower pressure deviation w.r.t. the set pressure reference value. 4 6

105 Designation GW A4/ Pressure switch switches when the pressure exceeds or drops below the adjusted setpoint. Metal housing, powder-coated (IP 65) Pressure switch switches when the pressure exceeds or drops below the adjusted setpoint. GW 500 A4 HP Au-M-V0 Pressure connection V0 Pressure connection G 1/4 position 0 Made in Germany Ordering example Pressure switch design Pressure switch GW A4 HP Adjustment range bar Contact material Au Electrical connection Cable gland M0 x 1.5 G 1/4 pressure connection V0; at position 0 1 Electrical connection M M0 x 1.5 cable gland G 3 Equipment plug Contact material Au silver, gold-plated Version HP Adjustment ranges [bar] GW 500 A4 0,1-0,5 GW 000 A4 0,4 -,0 GW 6000 A4 1,0-6,0 Pressure switch type GW A4 Clear cover, PC, (IP 54) Pressure switch switches when the pressure exceeds or drops below the adjusted setpoint. GW A4/ High-pressure Metal housing, powder-coated (IP 65) Pressure switch switches when the pressure exceeds or drops below the adjusted setpoint. GW 500 A4 HP [Au-M-V0] Made in Germany Accessories for pressure switches GW A4 HP 6 Bestell-Nr. Kit: G3 equipment plug, 3-pin + E for GW A Line sockets, 3-pin + E grey GDMW for GW A4,GW A4/ Fluorescent lamp assembly kit 30 V yellow Fluorescent lamp assembly kit 10 V yellow Display LED assembly kit 4 V yellow Fluorescent lamp assembly kit 30 V green Display LED assembly kit 4 V green

106 High-pressure switch for gas, air, flue gases and combustion products GW A4 HP GW A4/ HP Technical overview 1 bar = 1000 mbar = 100 kpa mm WS Type Version [Au-M-V0] Order No. Setting range [bar] p max [bar] GW A4 HP Pressure switch GW 500 A4 HP bar bar Supplied in separate packaging Type Degree of protection GW 000 A4 HP IP 54 IP GW 6000 A4 HP IP Version [Au-G3-V0] Order No. Setting range [bar] p max [bar] GW A4 HP Pressure switch GW 500 A4 HP bar bar Degree of protection GW 000 A4 HP IP 54 IP GW 6000 A4 HP IP Supplied in separate packaging including line socket Type Version [Au-M-V0] Order No. Setting range [bar] p max [bar] GW A4/ HP Pressure switch GW 500 A4/ HP bar bar Supplied in separate packaging Type Degree of protection GW 000 A4/ HP IP 65 IP GW 6000 A4/ HP IP Version [Au-G3-V0] Order No. Setting range [bar] p max [bar] GW A4/ HP Pressure switch GW 500 A4/ HP bar bar Degree of protection GW 000 A4/ HP IP 65 IP GW 6000 A4/ HP IP Supplied in separate packaging including line socket Differential pressure switch p [bar] bar bar Differential pressure switch p [bar] bar bar Differential pressure switch p [bar] bar bar Differential pressure switch p [bar] bar bar 6 6

107 High-pressure switch for gas, air, flue gases and combustion products GW A4 HP GW A4/ HP Technical description The GW A4 HP pressure switch is an adjustable pressure switch as per EN 1854 (GW 6000 A4 as per DIN 3398T3) for burners. It is suitable for closing, opening or switching over a current circuit when the actual pressure value deviates from the specified pressure setpoint. The specified pressure setpoint (operating point) is set at a setting wheel using a scale. Application Pressure monitoring in burner control systems Suitable for gases of gas families 1,,3 and other neutral gaseous media, as well as air, flue gases and combustion products. Approvals EU type test approval as per EC Gas Appliance Directive: GW A4... CE-0085 AO 30 EU type test approval as per EC Pressure Equipment Directive: GW A4... CE0036 Approvals in other important gasconsuming countries.

108 Functional Pressure switch for applications involving excess pressure. GW A4 HP The pressure counteracts the force of the setting spring on the micro-switch via the metal bellows. The pressure switch does not require power assistance. Pressure switch GW A4 HP The switching mechanism reacts to overpressure and closes, opens or switches over a current circuit when the specified pressure setpoint is overshot or undershot. All gas-carrying parts are made of stainless steel and, therefore, are suitable for: - applications involving operating pressures greater than 600 mbar - aggressive media such as sulphuric acid up to a concentration of 1.0 % by vol., humid - fluids (on request) Switching function As pressure rises: 1 NC opens, NO closes. As pressure falls: 1 NC closes, NO opens. Definition of switching difference p The switching difference p is the pressure difference between the upper and lower switching pressures. COM 3 p 1 NO NC Pressure at meter Switching difference, p Setting tolerance Adjustment as pressure falls Upper switching pressure Rising Falling Lower switching pressure COM 3 COM 3 p p 1 N 1 N NO GW A4, Design: Clear cover Degree of protection IP 54 IP 54 NC 5 Protection against ingress of solid particles ø 1 mm Protection against access to hazardous parts with a wire, ø 1 mm Complete contact protection 4 Protection against a water jet. No hazardous conditions may result. NO GW A4, Design: Metal housing Degree of protection IP 65 IP 65 NC 6 Protection against the entry of dust (dust sealed). Protection against access to hazardous parts with a wire, ø 1 mm Complete contact protection 5 Protection against a water jet from a nozzle directed at the unit (housing) from any directions No hazardous conditions may result (water jet). 6

109 Specifications Max. operating pressure GW 500 A4 HP p max = bar setting range bar p max = 5 bar setting range bar Pressure connection GW 000 A4 HP p max = 5 bar (gas) GW 6000 A4 HP p max = 8 bar (gas) p+: centrally on underside of housing, G 1/4 internal thread to ISO 8: Gas or air Temperature range Ambient temperature -15 C to +70 C Medium temperature -15 C to +70 C Storage temperature -30 C to +80 C Materials GW A4 HP Housing lower section Switch Switching contact Metal bellows Hood GW A4/ HP Hood aluminium die casting polycarbonate standard: silver gold-plated (Au), suitable for DDCapplications: DC 4 V; 0,0 A (stainless steel) polycarbonate die cast zinc, powder coated Switching voltage AC eff. min. 4 V max. 50 V DC min. 4 V max. 48 V DDC application: DC min. 5 V max. 4 V Nominal current AC eff. 10 A DDC application: DC max. 0 ma Switching current AC eff. min. 0 ma max. 6 A with cos ϕ 1 AC eff. max. 3 A with cos ϕ 0,6 DC min. 0 ma max. 1 A DDC application: DC min. 5 ma max. 0 ma Electrical connection Standard at screw terminals via cable gland, M0x1.5 Special version plug connection for line sockets as pert DIN EN , 3-pin with protection contact Degree of protection GW A4 HP IP 54 to IEC 59 (EN 6059), (clear hood) GW A4/ HP IP 65 to IEC 59 (EN 6059), (metal housing) Adjustment Setting tolerance With rising pressure and installed in a vertical position. Optional rising or dropping pressure adjustment on-site possible. Note switch point change if installation position changes.. ±15% switch point deviation based on the setpoint and with unit installed in a vertical position 3 6

110 Dimensions [mm] GW A4 HP.5 x 9 dia. deep for equipment plug as per DINEN , 18,5 G 1/4 pressure connection 76 53,75 (LK 76) + SW 1 4 X Ø 4, Made in Germany M0 x 1.5 or plug-type connection for cable socket according to DIN EN GW A4/ HP IP 65 with metal housing, cable gland M 0 x 1.5 GW A4/ HP IP 65 with metal housing, plug-in connection for sockets in according to DIN EN self-tapping cylinder bolts M3x14 slot 0.8 and cross slot to DIN 796-Z 77 53,75 ø 4, - 0, G 1/4 38,5 38, 67, , ,6 SW 1 SW 1 4 self-tapping cylinder bolts M3x14 slot 0.8 and cross slot to DIN 796-Z 77 53,75 ø 4, - 0, + G 1/4 38,5 G 1/4 7 G 1/4 pressure connection gas or air G 1/4 pressure connection gas or air SW = Wrench width Installation position α Standard installation position; if a different installation position is used, pay attention to the changed operating points: GW 500 A4 HP ca. ± 10 mbar GW 000 A4 HP ca. ± 0 mbar GW 6000 A4 HP ca. ± 80 mbar α When installed horizontally, the pressure switch switches at a pressure higher α When installed horizontally overhead, the pressure switch switches at a pressure lowe α When installed at an intermediate position, the pressure switch responds if there is maximum upper or lower pressure deviation w.r.t. the set pressure reference value. 4 6

111 Designation GW A4/ Pressure switch switches when the pressure exceeds or drops below the adjusted setpoint. Metal housing, powder-coated (IP 65) Pressure switch switches when the pressure exceeds or drops below the adjusted setpoint. GW 500 A4 HP Au-M-V0 Pressure connection V0 Pressure connection G 1/4 position 0 Made in Germany Ordering example Pressure switch design Pressure switch GW A4 HP Adjustment range bar Contact material Au Electrical connection Cable gland M0 x 1.5 G 1/4 pressure connection V0; at position 0 1 Electrical connection M M0 x 1.5 cable gland G 3 Equipment plug Contact material Au silver, gold-plated Version HP Adjustment ranges [bar] GW 500 A4 0,1-0,5 GW 000 A4 0,4 -,0 GW 6000 A4 1,0-6,0 Pressure switch type GW A4 Clear cover, PC, (IP 54) Pressure switch switches when the pressure exceeds or drops below the adjusted setpoint. GW A4/ High-pressure Metal housing, powder-coated (IP 65) Pressure switch switches when the pressure exceeds or drops below the adjusted setpoint. GW 500 A4 HP [Au-M-V0] Made in Germany Accessories for pressure switches GW A4 HP 6 Bestell-Nr. Kit: G3 equipment plug, 3-pin + E for GW A Line sockets, 3-pin + E grey GDMW for GW A4,GW A4/ Fluorescent lamp assembly kit 30 V yellow Fluorescent lamp assembly kit 10 V yellow Display LED assembly kit 4 V yellow Fluorescent lamp assembly kit 30 V green Display LED assembly kit 4 V green

112 High-pressure switch for gas, air, flue gases and combustion products GW A4 HP GW A4/ HP Technical overview 1 bar = 1000 mbar = 100 kpa mm WS Type Version [Au-M-V0] Order No. Setting range [bar] p max [bar] GW A4 HP Pressure switch GW 500 A4 HP bar bar Supplied in separate packaging Type Degree of protection GW 000 A4 HP IP 54 IP GW 6000 A4 HP IP Version [Au-G3-V0] Order No. Setting range [bar] p max [bar] GW A4 HP Pressure switch GW 500 A4 HP bar bar Degree of protection GW 000 A4 HP IP 54 IP GW 6000 A4 HP IP Supplied in separate packaging including line socket Type Version [Au-M-V0] Order No. Setting range [bar] p max [bar] GW A4/ HP Pressure switch GW 500 A4/ HP bar bar Supplied in separate packaging Type Degree of protection GW 000 A4/ HP IP 65 IP GW 6000 A4/ HP IP Version [Au-G3-V0] Order No. Setting range [bar] p max [bar] GW A4/ HP Pressure switch GW 500 A4/ HP bar bar Degree of protection GW 000 A4/ HP IP 65 IP GW 6000 A4/ HP IP Supplied in separate packaging including line socket Differential pressure switch p [bar] bar bar Differential pressure switch p [bar] bar bar Differential pressure switch p [bar] bar bar Differential pressure switch p [bar] bar bar 6 6

113 Compact pressure switch for multiple actuators GW A5 GW A5/ Technical description The GW A5 pressure switch is a compact pressure switch as per EN 1854 for DUNGS multiple actuators. The pressure switches are suitable for switching a circuit on, off or over on changes in actual pressure relative to the set switching point (reference value). The switching point can be set easily and quickly using a setting wheel provided with a scale without using a pressure gauge. Application Pressure switches for DUNGS multiple actuators GasMultiBloc and DMV double solenoid valve which can be either mounted directly on housing or by using an adapter. Suitable for gases of families 1,,3 and other neutral gaseous media. Approvals EC type test approval as per EC Gas Appliance Directive: GW A5 CE-0085 AO 30 EC type test approval as per EC Pressure Equipment Directive: GW A5 CE0036 Pressure switch class "S" as per EN Approvals in other important gasconsuming countries..

114 Functional description Single-acting pressure switch in overpressure range. The pressure switches operate without any power supply. Switching response GW A5 Short response time during pressure fluctuations. Specifications GW A5/1 Slow response time during short-term pressure fluctuations by additional damping nozzle. Pressure Switch The GW A5 is a single-acting pressure switch acting in pressure range. The control unit responds to pressure. If the set reference value is exceeded or undershot, the circuit is switched on, off or over. Switching function As pressure rises: 1 NC opens, NO closes As pressure falls: 1 NC closes, NO opens COM 3 p NO 1 NC Max. operating pressure GW 3 A5 - GW 150 A5 GW 500 A5 500 mbar (50 kpa) 600 mbar (60 kpa) Pressure connection Measuring connection Temperature range O ring flange connection on underside of pressure switch ø 9, length 10 mm, with screw plug Ambient temperature -15 C to +70 C Medium temperature -15 C to +70 C Storage temperature -30 C to +80 C Materials Housing: Switch: Diaphragms: Switching contact: Aluminium die casting Polyamide NBR Ag Switching voltage Nominal current AC eff. min. 4 V max. 50 V DC min. 4 V max. 48 V GW A5 AC eff. max. 10 A GW 3 A5 AC eff. max. 6 A Switching current Electrical connection Degree of protection Setting tolerance AC eff. max. 6 A at cos ϕ 1 AC eff. max. 4 A at cos ϕ 1 AC eff. max. 3 A at cos ϕ 0,6 AC eff. max. A at cos ϕ 0,6 AC eff. min. 0 ma AC eff. min. 0 ma DC min. 0 ma DC min. 0 ma DC max. 1 A DC max. 1 A Plug connection for line sockets as per DIN EN , 3-pin, protection insulated without ground connection IP 54 as per IEC 59 (EN 6059) ±15% switching point deviation referred to reference value, adjusted at pressure rises, vertical diaphragm position Installation position Standard installation position; if different observe the change in switching point: GW 3 50 A5 max. ± 0,6 mbar GW 150 A5 max. ± 1 mbar GW 500 A5 max. ± 3 mbar In the horizontal installation position the switching pressure is increased. When the pressure switch is mounted horizontally overhead, its switching pressure decreases. When the pressure switch is mounted in an intermediate position, its switching pressure deviates. 6

115 Designation V1 Pressure connection G 1/4 Position 1 MS6 Test nipple at position 6 G3 Equipment connector, 3 pol protection-insulated, w/o grounding Order example Pressure switch design Pressure Switch GW A5 Setting range mbar Contact material Ag Electrical connection Equipment connector Pressure connection At position 1 Test nipple MS 6 Ag 3 0, GW A5 Pressure switch switches when the setpoint is exceeded or undershot. GW A5/1 Pressure switch with damping nozzle switches on if the set reference value is exceeded or undershot. GW 150 A5 [Ag-G3-MS6-V1] Dimensions [mm] Test nipple ø 9 48,5 34 Slot for O ring 10,5 x,5 53,75 ± 0, Pressure connection optionally with damping nozzle for GW...A5/1 1,5 Fastening holes 44,7 4, 5, 1 3 ø 4, 1,5 6, ,5 6 Made in Germany IP Plug connection for line socket as per Seal DIN EN Safety cover for plug-type connection

116 Mounting options GW A5 GasMultiBloc MB /403 Pressure tap GW A5 mounting possible... p e 3 p a 1 yes, with # 1630 yes yes p e 3 p a 4 yes, with # ,3 seal plug G 1/8 Instrument gland, optional 4 Instrument gland Mounting options GW A5 GasMultiBloc MB-D ; MB-ZR Pressure tap GW A5 mounting possible... 1 alternative to p e 4 pa 5 pbr 1 6 no pe 4 pa 5 pbr 3 yes 7 3 p e 4 pa 5 pbr 4 yes 5 6 yes, with # yes, with # yes, 1,3,4 seal plug G 1/8 (standard) ,6 Instrument gland, optional G 1/8 5 M4 inner hex 6 3 pe 4 pa 5 pbr Mounting options GW A5 Safety solenoid valve SV Pressure tap GW A5 mounting possible SV 505/507 SV 510/51 SV 50 Pressure tap 3 Pressure tap 4 1 pe pa pa Pressure tap 1 no pe pe Pressure tap 3 no pe (1) pe 4 pa with horizontal pa 1) pa 1) For pressure switch assembly, pay attention to the flange attachment. 4 6

117 Mounting options GW A5 Double solenoid valve DMV 503/11 Pressure tap GW A5 mounting possible yes yes V1 V 3 yes, with # yes (horizontal), with # (vertical) 1,,4 G 1/8 seal plug as per DIN ISO 8 3 Seal Plug as per M4 The seal plugs 1,,4 can also be replaced by a G 1/8 instrument gland as per DIN ISO 8 Mounting options GW A5 Double solenoid valve DMV /11 GasMultiBloc MB MBC-300/700/100 Pressure tap 1 GW A5 mounting possible... yes V1 V 1 3 yes yes, with # yes (horizontal), with # (vertical) V1 V 1 3 1,,3,4 G 1/8 seal plug as per DIN ISO 8 The seal plugs 1,,3,4 can also be replaced by a G 1/8 instrument gland as per 1DIN ISO Mounting options GW A5 Double solenoid valve DMV 55, DMV 5040/11-515/11 DMV-1500-D, DMV DMV MBC MBC (pressure tap 4 no) Pressure tap GW A5 mounting possible yes yes yes V1 V yes no no 1,,3,4 G 1/8 seal plug as per DIN ISO 8 5,6 G 1/4 DIN ISO 8 The seal plugs 1,,3,4 can also be replaced by a G 1/8 instrument gland as per DIN ISO 8

118 Compact pressure switch for multiple actuators GW A5 GW A5/1 Mounting options GW...A5 at pre-mount filter for Dungsmultiple actuator Pressure tap after filter insert GW...A5 p 1 MB-D MB-D...40 MB-ZR MB-ZR...40 MB-VEF 415 MB-VEF 40 DMV-D...51/11 DMV-D...50/11 DMV-SE 51/11 DMV-SE 50/11 Brief technical data 1 mbar = 100 Pa = 0,1 kpa 10 mm WS Type Version Order No. Setting range [mbar] Switching difference p [mbar] GW A5 GW 3 A5 pressure switch GW 10 A5 GW 50 A5 GW 150 A5 GW 500 A5 Supplied in collective packaging , ,7 1, Standard designs GW A5 [Ag-G3-MS6-V1] with mounting kit Accessories Order-No. for Type Nominal diameters Mounting kit ( x M4x0,1 x O-ring) 3 80 Adapter p Br MB-D MB-Z DMV Rp 3/8 - Rp Rp 3/8 - Rp Rp 3/8 - Rp Adapter on threaded flange (G 1/8) MB DMV- SV Rp 3/8 - Rp 1 1/4 Rp 3/8 - Rp Adapter kit for GW A5 with G 1/4 connection 98 DMV- MB Rp 3/8 - Rp Special adapter on request MB- DMV-... MVD-... DN 40 - DN 15 Rp 3/8 - DN 150 Line socket 3-pin + E grey GDMW We reserve the right to make any changes in the interest of technical progress. 6 6

119 Ball Valve Technical description Rp 1/4 to Rp ball valve, PN 5 as per DIN EN 331. DN 5 to DN 00 ball valve, PN 16 as per DIN EN 13774, Part 1. Rugged and very user-friendly design. Application The ball valve is for manual shut-off and for releasing gases of families 1,, 3 and other neutral gaseous media. Other media are air, water, light and domestic heating oils. Each gas train in conventional design or as DUNGS GasMultiBloc must be completed with a ball valve. Approvals EC type test approval as per EC Gas Appliance Directive: KH 50.. CE-0085 BU 015 KH CE-0085 AT 0437 KH CE-0085 BN 0185 EC type test approval as per EC Pressure Equipment Directive: KH 50.. CE0035 KH CE0035 HTB 650 C KH Approvals in other important gas consuming countries. 1 4

120 Dimensions [mm] Specifications Thread design KH 50 Internal thread Rp 1/4 to Rp - DIN 999 External thread R 1/4 bis R - ISO 7-1 Tube diameter DN 8 to DN 50 Operating pressure max. 5 bar Temperature range -30 C to +170 C (in general) -0 C to +60 C (gas) Housing brass, chrome-plated Ball brass, chrome-plated Seal PTFE O rings Viton Handle grip stainless steel with plastic coating Flange design KH 160 Flange as per DIN EN 109- Overall length DN as per DIN 30-F4 Overall length DN 00 as per DIN 30-F5 Nominal diameters DN 5 to DN 00 Operating pressure max. 16 bar, Standard max. 4 bar, DN Temperature range -0 C to +60 C (gas) Housing spheroidal graphite iron casting (GGG40) Ball hollow ball design (stainless steel) Seal PTFE O rings Viton, Perburan Handle grip annealed cast iron/aluminium free of nonferrous metals 4

121 Overview Article designation 1) Order no. Max. operating pressure Connection threads Connection Rp/DN Dimensions [mm] a b c SW ) Weight [kg] KH 500 II KH 5003 II KH 5005 II KH 5007 II KH 5010 II KH 501 II KH 5015 II KH 500 II bar 5 bar 5 bar 5 bar 5 bar 5 bar 5 bar 5 bar Internal / internal Internal / internal Internal / internal Internal / internal Internal / internal Internal / internal Internal / internal Internal / internal Rp 1/4 Rp 3/8 Rp 1/ Rp 3/4 Rp 1 Rp 1 1/4 Rp 1 1/ Rp KH 500 IA KH 5003 IA KH 5005 IA KH 5007 IA KH 5010 IA KH 501 IA KH 5015 IA KH 500 IA bar 5 bar 5 bar 5 bar 5 bar 5 bar 5 bar 5 bar Internal / external Internal / external Internal / external Internal / external Internal / external Internal / external Internal / external Internal / external Rp 1/4 Rp 3/8 Rp 1/ Rp 3/4 Rp 1 Rp 1 1/4 Rp 1 1/ Rp KH KH KH KH KH KH KH / 16 bar 3) 4 / 16 bar 3) 4 / 16 bar 3) 4 / 16 bar 3) 4 / 16 bar 3) 4 / 16 bar 3) 4 / 16 bar 3) DN 5 DN 3 DN 40 DN 50 DN 65 DN 80 DN KH KH bar 16 bar DN 15 DN KH bar DN ) KH = Ball valve ) SW = wrench width 3) 4 HTB 650 C 3 4

122 Vent gas solenoid valve LGV/ Technical description The DUNGS vent gas solenoid valve LGV/5 is a normally when open, automatic pressure relief as per EN 161 for gas burners and gas appliances. - Max. operating pressure: 500 mbar (50 kpa) - Class A, Group as per EN normally open (N.O.) - Fast closing - Fast opening - DC solenoid, rectifier wiring with radio suppression interference in terminal box - Mountable closed position signal contact to monitor closed position of valve - Reliable function, rugged and maintenance-free - It does not contain any non-ferrous metals, suitable for gases of up to max. 0.1 vol.% H S, dry Application The DUNGS vent gas solenoid valve LGV/5 is suitable for gases of families 1,, 3 and other neutral gaseous media. The vent gas solenoid valve is used for the shut-off and release of upstream gas volumes. Approval EC type test approval as per EC Gas Appliance Directive: LGV 50../5 CE-0085 AP04 EC type test approval as per EC Pressure Equipment Directive: LGV 50../5 CE0036 Approvals in other important gas consuming countries.

123 LGV/5 Single-stage solenoid valve, normally open, fast opening, fast closing. Closed position signal contact mountable. Specifications Nominal diameters Pipe thread as per ISO 7/1 Flange Max. operating pressure Solenoid valve Closing time Opening time DN 0 Rp 3/4 Connection flange as per DIN EN mbar (50 kpa) Valve as per EN < 1 s < 1 s Materials of gas-conveying parts Housing: Seals: aluminium, steel, not containing non-ferrous metals NBR basis Voltage/frequency Rating / power consumption Switch-on duration Degree of protection Electrical connection Switching rate Measuring/ignition gas connection Ambient temperature Installation position Closed position signal contact Accessories Hz, 30 V AC (+10% -15%); further voltages on request 15 VA/0.08 A, at 0 C and 30 VAC 100 % IP 54, IP 65 on request At screw terminals via PG* 11 cable gland (* = heavy-gauge conduit thread) Plug connection as per DIN EN , can be retrofitted Max. 1000/h G 1/4 ISO 8, on both sides in inlet section -15 C to +60 C Solenoid from vertically upright to horizontally lying Type K01/1 (DIN-tested), mountable on LGV 5.../5 K01/1 closed position signal contact, see Datasheet Equipment plug for line socket as per DIN EN

124 Dimensions [mm] LGV 507/5 Dimensions [mm] LGV 500/5 Type p max. [mbar] Rp / DN Order No. Weight LGV 507 /5 500 Rp 3 / LGV 500/5 500 DN Functional description The DUNGS vent gas solenoid valve is an automatic shut-off valve operated with auxiliary power. The electromag- netic drive closes against the force of the pressure spring. If the auxiliary power is interrupted (operating voltage), the pressure spring opens the valve within 1 second. The closed position of the valve can be monitored by a mountable closed position signal contact. 3 4

125 Leakage gas solenoid valve LGV/5 Flow diagram LGV 507/5 LGV 500/ p [mbar] ,0 0,9 0,8 0,7 0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 0, Basis + 15 C, 1013 mbar, trocken Based on + 15 C, 1013 mbar, dry Base + 15 C, 1013 mbar, sec Base + 15 C, 1013 mbar, secco Vn [m 3 /h] Luft / Air / Aria dv = 1, Vn [m 3 /h] Erdgas/Natural gas/gaz Naturel/Gas metano dv = 0,65 4 4

126 GasMultiBloc Control and safety combination One-stage mode MBC-65 MBC Compact design (105 mm long) The following components can be integrated: - Microfilter - x A valves - Servopressure regulator - Pressure switch Max. operating pressure MBC-65: p max. 00 mbar (0 kpa) MBC-65-N..: p max. 65 mbar (6.5 kpa) MBC-10: p max. 360 mbar (36 kpa) MBC-10-N..: p max. 100 mbar (10 kpa) Degree of protection: IP Radio interference suppression; interference level N Ambient temperature: -15 C bis +60 C Other available servo pressure regulator models: - Zero pressure - Constant pressure regulator Ratio V=p Br /p L =0,45:1 1:1 Technical description Filter, valves, regulator and pressure switch are integrated in the DUNGS GasMultiBloc to form a compact fitting. - Dirt trap: Microfilter - One regulator and two valves - Two valves (fast opening) - Regulator (fast opening) or regulator (slow opening) - Solenoid valves as per DIN EN 161 Class A Group MBC-65 to 00 mbar (0 kpa) MBC-10 to 360 mbar (36 kpa) - Sensitive setting of output pressure via servopressure regulator as per DIN EN 88 Class C Group - Opening delay by means of damped pressure rise - High flow values at low pressure difference - DC voltage solenoid drive - Main valve restrictor downstream of regulator - Flange connections with tube threads as per ISO 7/1 - Easy-to-mount, small dimensions, low weight Application The modular system provides individual solutions in gas safety and control systems. Suitable for gases of gas families 1,, 3 and other neutral gaseous media. Approvals EC type test approval as per EC Gas Appliance Directive: MB-65/10- CE-0085 AU 0377 EC type test approval as per EC Pressure Equipment Directive: MB-65/10- CE0036 Approvals in other important gas consuming countries.

127 Functional description Gas flow 1. Valves V1 and V are closed. Inlet pressure is applied to chamber A until valve V1 is seated.. The min. pressure switch is connected to Chamber A by a borehole. If the inlet pressure exceeds the reference value set on the pressure switch, it switches to the automatic gas burner control. 3. After a release signal from the automatic gas burner control, valves V1 and V open. The gas flow through chambers A, B, C and D of the GasMultiBloc is released. Dirt trap device Dirt trap device, fine-meshed filter (1) to protect the fitting. Sectional view MBC-65-DLE-S0 1 3 A B Pressure taps 4 C 5 6 D Microfilter. Inlet P1 3. Housing 4. Spring, gas pressure regulator 5. Diaphragms, gas pressure regulator 6. Cover side 7. Nozzle 8. Outlet P3 9. Main flow restrictor 10. Start gas restrictor 11. Damper 1. Servopressure regulator 13. Adjustment screw - main flow 14. Reference value adjustment device - pressure regulator 15. Adjustment screw - start flow 16. Solenoid housing V1, V 17. Electrical connection 18 Setting of opening time (only MBC-10) Operating mode of valve V1 and valve V The plungers of valves V1 and V are connected to the valve plate units. On opening, the plungers pretension the closing springs. The valves open completely without limitation. MBC-65 1 V1 V 10 1 P 9 P 3 Closing function When the power supply of solenoid coils of V1 and V is interrupted, the valves are closed within < 1s by means of pressure springs. MBC-10 P Operating mode of servopressure regulator The servopressure regulator equalises the pressure fluctuations in the power supply. The output pressure is set at the reference value adjustment device (14). The servopressure regulator controls the pressure regulator (5) via nozzle (7). The slow opening function is enabled by a damped pressure increase. The opening time of MBC-10 cannot be set. With MBC-10, the opening behaviour can be adjusted at high operating pressure values. Start flow adjustment The adjustment screw (15) for the start flow restrictor (10) is closed (factory setting). The start flow can be set by opening the restrictor up to approx. 80 % of the main flow. Main flow adjustment The adjustment screw (13) for the main flow restrictor (9) is completely open (factory setting). The servopressure regulator keeps the output pressure upstream of the main flow restrictor constant. The burner pressure is determined when the output pressure and the main flow restrictor (9) are adjusted. Start-up response Main gas flow Start gas flow Time P 1 1 V1 V 10 Gas pressure switch The gas pressure switch monitors the gas pressure on the inlet side; the pressure switch is preset. 9 P 3 6

128 Specifications Nominal widths Flange with tube threads as per ISO 7/1 (DIN 999) Max. operating pressure MBC MBC Rp 3/8, Rp 1/ Rp 3/4 MBC-65- p max. 00 mbar (0 kpa) MBC-65-N../S00/S0 p max. 65 mbar (6.5 kpa) MBC-10- p max. 360 mbar (36 kpa) MBC-10-N../S00/S0 p max. 100 mbar (10 kpa) Output pressure ranges P3 (p a ) MBC- -DLE S0/S MBC- -DLE S40/S4 MBC- -ND/S00/S0 3 mbar to 15 mbar (0.3 to 1.5 kpa) 4 mbar to 37 mbar (0.4 to 3.7 kpa) 0 ± 0. mbar (0 ± 0.0 kpa) Media Ambient temperature Dirt trap device Pressure switches Pressure regulator Solenoid valve V1 Solenoid valve V Gases of gas families 1,, 3 and other neutral gaseous media -15 C to +60 C Filter with 10µm mesh width Types GW A5, GW A, NB A, ÜB A can be mounted as per DIN EN For further information, refer to datasheet GW...A No and datasheet GW...A5 No Servopressure regulator as per DIN EN 88 Class C. Reference value spring is installed permanently (no spring replacement possible). Blow-out line over roof top must not be installed. Internal pulse tap available. Valve as per DIN 161 Class A Group, fast closing, fast opening Valve as per DIN 161 Class A Group, fast closing, fast opening Design Valves V1 and V Pressure regulator MBC- -DLE fast closing slow opening MBC- -ND fast closing slow opening, proportional regulator zero pressure regulator Measuring/ignition gas connection Voltage/frequency Electrical connection Performance/power consumption Switch-on period Degree of protection Radio interference suppression See Pressure taps, page ~(AC) Hz 0-30 V - 15 % + 10 % Preferred voltages: VAC, 4 VDC Plug connection as per DIN EN for valves and pressure switches or DIN 4634 for safety extra-low voltage MBC VA per ~(AC) 30 V, 0 C MBC VA per ~(AC) 30 V, 0 C 100 % ED IP 54 as per IEC 59 (EN 6059) Interference level N Material of gas-wetted parts Housing Diaphragms, seals Solenoid drive Aluminium NBR basis, cork Steel, brass, aluminium Installation position Vertical, with solenoid pointing upwards or lying with horizontal solenoid and their intermediate layers 3 6

129 Adjustment range Application of constant pressure regulator Adjustment range Application of zero pressure regulator Adjustment instructions Rapid and simple adjustment by means of: Adjust offset correction using setting screw on servo regulator. Adjust maximum flow using flow restriction screw. 4 6

130 Volume flow pressure difference characteristics in steady state with microsieve MBC-65 Based on +15 C, 1013 mbar, dry MBC-10 Based on +15 C, 1013 mbar, dry f = Air density Density of gas used Gas type Natural gas City gas Liquefied gas Air Density [kg/m 3 ] dv f V verwendetes Gas/gas used/ gaz utilisé/gas utilizzato = V Luft/air/air/aria x f

131 GasMultiBloc Control and safety combination One-stage mode MBC-65- MBC-10- Dimensions [mm] e d c a b f Type Rp Opening time a Dimensions [mm] b c d e f Rating/Power Consumption ~(AC) 30 V; + 0 C Weight [kg] MBC-65 MBC-10 Rp 1/ Rp 3/4 < 1 s < 0 s VA 5 VA 1,5 1,6 We reserve the right to make any changes in the interest of technical progress. 6 6

132 GasMultiBloc Combined servo pressure regulator and safety shut-off valves MBC-300-SE MBC-700-SE MBC-100-SE MBC-300-N MBC-700-N 7.01 Max. operating pressure 360 mbar (36 kpa) Compact design High flow rates Low weight Low power consumption Modulating mode Adjustable outlet pressure up to 300 mbar (30 kpa) Other servo pressure regulator variants: - zero pressure - constant pressure 1 8 Mountable accessories - Pressure switch - VPS Technical Description The DUNGS multiple actuator MBC...SE integrates filter, valves and servo pressure regulator in one compact unit: - Dirt trap: Microfilter - Solenoid valves up to 360 mbar (36 kpa) to DIN EN 161 Class A Group, fast opening - Servo pressure regulator unit to DIN EN 88 Class A Group - Outlet pressure: mbar (0-30 kpa) - Precision regulation of outlet pressure - For optimal outlet pressure stability - Flanged joints with pipe threads to ISO 7/1 or NPT - Easy to install - Low weight The modular system permits individual solutions with valve proving system, min./ max. pressure switches and pressure limiters. High flow rates at low pressure differences. Application The servo pressure regulator permits optimal mixture formation in forced air burners and premix burners in conjunction with mechanical or electronic integrated gas-air regulation units; this applies to modulating and multi-stage floating operating mode. Suitable for gases of gas families 1,,3 and other inert gaseous media. Approvals EC type test approval as per EC Gas Appliance Directive: MBC...SE CE-0085 BM 0345 EC type test approval as per EC Pressure Equipment Directive: MBC...SE CE0036 Approvals in other important gas consuming countries.

133 Functional Description Gas flow 1. If valves V1 and V are closed, chamber a is subjected to inlet pressure.. The min. pressure switch (option) is connected to chamber a via a boring. If the inlet pressure drops below the desired value set on the pressure switch, the switch opens in the direction of the gas burner control system. 3. After they are enabled by the gas burner control system, valves V1 and V open. Gas flow is released through chambers a and b. Functional description of the combined valve-regulator unit Valves V1 and V can be controlled electrically and separately. Each valve preloads its own compression spring when the plunger opens. When the two valves are open, a pressure pulse runs below the working diaphragm. The size of the pressure pulse changes as a factor of the variable restrictor position D. The outlet pressure p Br acts against the setting spring force via the servo diaphragm until a force equilibrium is attained. The opposite side of the servo diaphragm is subjected to ambient pressure p amb. Changes in the equilibrium of forces lead to a change in flow cross-section. The pressure under the working diaphragm re-adjusts itself. The regulator unit adapts the free valve cross-section to the new flow requirement. Schematic diagram MBC...SE/N M D S E R Working diaphragm Restrictor Servo diaphragm Setting spring for outlet pressure p Br Regulator disc a p 1 R p Br M S b E a, b Pressure chambers in flow direction p 1 Inlet pressure p Br Burner pressure, outlet pressure Ambient pressure p amb V1 D p Br intern Standard p 1 p V p amb p Br extern Option Closing function If there is an interruption in power supply to the solenoids of valves V1 and V, they are closed by the compression springs within <1s. 1 Pressure regulator unit Regulator spring 3 Connecting flange 4 Coarse and microfilters 5 Valve V1 6 Closing spring V1 7 Housing 8 Plunger V1 9 Solenoid V1 10 PCB 11 Electrical connection 1 Valve V 13 Closing spring V 14 Plunger V 15 Solenoid V 16 Solenoid housing 17 Adjustment: - Gas pressure p Br Pressure taps, gas train diagram MBC...SE/N ,, 3, 4, 5 Screw plug G 1/8 8

134 Technical Data Nominal widths Flanges with pipe threads to ISO 7/1 (DIN 999) Max. operating pressure Inlet pressure ranges Burner pressure ranges Media Ambient temperature Dirt trap device Pressure switch Servo pressure regulator Solenoid valve V1, V Measuring gas connection Voltage/frequency Electrical connection Rating/power consumption Switch-on duration Switching cycles Degree of protection Radio interference suppression MBC-300-SE MBC-700-SE MBC-100-SE Rp 1/, 3/4, 1, 1 1/4 Rp 1, 1 1/4, 1 1/, Rp 1, 1 1/4, 1 1/, and their combinations and their combinations and their combinations 360 mbar (36 kpa) S/S8: p e = mbar ( kpa) S30: p e = mbar ( kpa) S0/N: p e = mbar ( kpa) S: p Br : 4-0 mbar (0.4 - kpa) S8: p Br : 5-80 mbar (0.5-8 kpa) S30: p Br : mbar (3-30 kpa) S0/N: p Br : 0 ± mbar (0 ± 0. kpa) Gases of gas families 1,, 3 and other inert gaseous media -15 C up to +70 C (in LPG plants, do not operate MBC...SE below 0 C. Only suitable for gaseous LPG, liquid hydrocarbons destroy the seal materials) Micro-filter made of chopped-strand nonwoven fabric. Filter replaceable without removing fitting Types GW A5, NB A, ÜB A as per DIN EN 1854 retrofitable. For further information refer to Data Sheets Pressure switch for DUNGS multiple actuators 5.03 and 5.1 Servo pressure regulator with adjustable burner pressure, as per DIN EN 88 Class A, Group Versions for constant pressure and zero pressure available Valves as per DIN EN 161 Class A Group, fast-closing, fast-opening G 1/8 DIN ISO 8, at inlet and outlet flanges, on both sides downstream of filter, between V1 and V, downstream of V (fitting pressure switch may partially exclude measuring gas connection) ~(AC) Hz 30 V -15 % +10 %, other voltages on request. Standard voltages: ~(AC) 100 V - 10 V, =(DC) 4 V - 8 V Plug-in connection as per DIN EN at ~ (AC) 30 V; +0 C: see type summary 100 % ED 60 per hour (30 s on/off) IP 54 as per IEC 59 (EN 6059) Interference level N Materials of gas-conveying parts Housing Diaphragms, seals Solenoid drive die-cast aluminium on NBR base steel, aluminium Installation position S/S8/S30: Vertical with upright solenoid or horizontal with horizontal solenoid, as well as their spacers. S0/N: Vertical with upright solenoid 3 8

135 Mounting dimensions [mm] MBC-300/ MBC e = space requirement for solenoid replacement 4 8

136 Type Version Order No. 30 VAC DN Rp Opening time Mounting dimensions [mm] a b c d e f g Solenoid No. Switching ops/h Weight [kg] MBC-300-SE S / - 11/4 < 1 s /P MBC-300-SE S / - 11/4 < 1 s /P MBC-300-SE S / - 11/4 < 1 s /P MBC-300-N on request 1/ - 11/4 < 1 s /P MBC-700-SE S < 1 s /P MBC-700-SE S < 1 s /P MBC-700-SE S < 1 s /P MBC-700-N on request 1 - < 1 s /P MBC-100-SE S < 1 s /P MBC-100-SE S < 1 s /P MBC-100-SE S < 1 s /P MBC MBC MBC P max. [VA] for t = 3 s P max. [VA] Operation Flange for Rp/NPT Order No. Order No. MBC MBC MBC MBC Rp 1/ Rp 3/4 Rp 1 Rp 1 1/ Line socket 3 pole + PE MBC 700/ MBC 700/ MBC 700/ MBC 700/ Rp 1 Rp 1 1/4 Rp 1 1/ Rp Adapter, pressure gauge flange set G1/ Adapter GW A with G1/4 Adapter p Br Adapter GW A on flange MBC MBC MBC MBC NPT 1/ NPT 3/4 NPT 1 NPT 1 1/ Flanges, plug-in connection and system accessories must be ordered separately. MBC 700/ MBC 700/ MBC 700/ MBC 700/ NPT 1 NPT 1 1/4 NPT 1 1/ NPT

137 Volume flow pressure difference characteristics in steady state with microfilter. MBC Recommended operating range MBC (Rp 3/4) MBC (Rp 1/) MBC (Rp 1 & 1 1/4) Basis + 15 C, 1013 mbar, trocken Based on + 15 C, 1013 mbar, dry Base + 15 C, 1013 mbar, sec Base + 15 C, 1013 mbar, secco Vn [m 3/h] Luft / Air / Aria dv = 1, Vn [m 3/h] Erdgas/Natural gas/gaz Naturel/Gas metano dv = 0,65 6 8

138 Volume flow pressure difference characteristics in steady state with microfilter. MBC Recommended operating range MBC (Rp 1 1/4) MBC (Rp 1) MBC (Rp 1 1/ & ) Basis + 15 C, 1013 mbar, trocken Based on + 15 C, 1013 mbar, dry Base + 15 C, 1013 mbar, sec Base + 15 C, 1013 mbar, secco Vn [m 3/h] Luft / Air / Aria dv = 1, Vn [m 3/h] Erdgas/Natural gas/gaz Naturel/Gas metano dv = 0,65 7 8

139 GasMultiBloc Combined servo pressure regulator and safety shut-off valves MBC-300-SE MBC-700-SE MBC-100-SE MBC-300-N MBC-700-N Volume flow pressure difference characteristics in steady state with microfilter. MBC Recommended operating range Basis + 15 C, 1013 mbar, trocken Based on + 15 C, 1013 mbar, dry Base + 15 C, 1013 mbar, sec Base + 15 C, 1013 mbar, secco f = V gas used = Air density Density of gas used V air x f Gas type Natural gas Town gas Liquid gas Air Density [kg/m 3 ] dv f We reserve the right to make any changes in the interests of technical progress. 8 8

140 GasMultiBloc Combined regulator and safety valve Infinitely variable air/ gas ratio control mode MBC-300-VEF MBC-700-VEF MBC-100-VEF Max. operating pressure 360 mbar (36 kpa) Compact design High flow values Low weight Low power consumption Modulating mode Adjustable outlet pressure up to 300 mbar (30 kpa) Other available servo pressure regulator models: - zero pressure - constant pressure Mountable accessories - Pressure switch - VPS Ratio V = p Br / p L = 0.4:1 3:1 Zero point correction possible Internal pulse line p Br Technical Description The DUNGS multiple actuator MBC VEF offers filter, valves and servo pressure regulator in one compact unit: - Dirt trap: microfilter - solenoid valves up to 360 mbar (36 kpa) as per DIN EN 161 class A group - Servo pressure regulator as per DIN EN 88 class A group ; EN Fine setting of gas and air pressure ratio - Flange connections with pipe threads as per ISO 7/1 or NPT - Easy to install - Low weight As this system has a modular design, we can offer individual solutions with valve inspection system, pressure switches mini/ maxi and pressure limiters. High flow values at low pressure difference. Application The servo pressure regulator permits optimum mixture formation in forced air burners and premix burners; this applies to modulating and multi-stage variable operating modes. Suitable for gases of gas families 1,, 3 and other neutral gaseous media. Approvals EU type test approval as per EU Gas Appliance Directive: MBC...VEF CE-0085 BM 0345 EU type test approval as per EU Pressure Equipment Directive: MBC...VEF CE0036 Approvals in other important gas-consuming countries.

141 Functional Description Gas flow 1. If the V1 and V valves are closed, chamber a is under inlet pressure.. The min. pressure switch (option) is connected to chamber a via a borehole. If the inlet pressure exceeds the reference value set in the pressure switch, the switch switches through to the automatic burner control. 3. The V1 and V valves open after they are enabled by the automatic burner control. Gas flow through the chambers a and b is enabled. Functional description of the valveregulator combination Valves V1 and V can be controlled electrically and independent of each other. Each valve pretensions its own pressure spring when the plunger opens. If both valves are open, a pressure pulse is sent under the working diaphragm M. The intensity of this pressure pulse changes depending on the adjustable restrictor point D. The comparison diaphragms S 1 for burner pressure p Br and S for blower pressure p L are connected with each other via a rod. The ratio V can be set by shifting the bearing point. Zero point correction N acts on this rod mechanism via the air diaphragm S. Ambient pressure p amb or firing chamber pressure p F must be applied to the area between the comparison diaphragms. The firing chamber pressure reduces the burner pressure at a ratio of V > 1. Changes in the equilibrium of forces result in a change in the flow crosssection. The pressure under the working diaphragm is re-adjusted. The regulator unit adapts the free valve cross-section depending on the new flow requirement. Closing function If the supply voltage of the solenoid coils of V1 and V valves is interrupted, the pressure springs close the valves in <1s. Block diagram MBC...VEF M D S1 S R Working diaphragm Restrictor Servo diaphragm for burner pressure p BR Servo diaphragm for blower pressure p L Regulator disc Pressure regulator unit Regulator spring 3 Connecting flange 4 Coarse filter and microfilters 5 Valve V1 6 Closing spring V1 7 Housing Pressure taps, gas train diagram MBC...VEF p 1 a p 1 R p Br M V1 S 1 V S b a, b Pressure chambers in flow direction p 1 Inlet pressure p Br Burner pressure, outlet pressure: P amb Ambient pressure Blower pressure p L V p Br 8 Plunger V1 9 Solenoid V1 10 Printed circuit board 11 Electrical connection 1 Valve V 13 Closing spring V 14 Plunger V N D p Br internal standard p F p amb p L p F p L p Br external option 15 Solenoid V 16 Solenoid housing Setting: 17 Gas-air ratio 18 Zero point correction ,, 3, 4, 5 Screw plug G 1/8 6, 7 Seal plug G 1/

142 Technical Data Nominal widths Flanges with pipe threads according to ISO 7/1 (DIN 999) Max. operating pressure Inlet pressure range Guiding range Burner pressure range Media Ambient temperature Dirt trap device Pressure switch Servo pressure regulator Ratio setting range V Zero point correction N Solenoid valve V1, V Measuring gas connection Burner pressure monitor p Br Pulse and connection lines Voltage/frequency Electrical connection Rating / power consumption Switch-on duration Switching cycles Degree of protection Radio interference suppression MBC-300-VEF MBC-700-VEF MBC-100-VEF Rp 1/, 3/4, 1, 1 1/4 Rp 1, 1 1/4, 1 1/, Rp 1, 1 1/4, 1 1/, and their combinations and their combinations and their combinations 360 mbar (36 kpa) p e : 15 mbar (1.5 kpa) to 360 mbar (36 kpa) p L : 0.4 mbar (0.04 kpa) to 100 mbar (10 kpa) p Br : 0.5 mbar (0.05 kpa) to 100 mbar (10 kpa) Gases of gas families 1,, 3 and other neutral gaseous media. -15 C to +70 C (do not operate MBC VEF below 0 C in liquefied gas systems. Only suitable for gaseous LPG; liquid hydrocarbons destroy the seal materials) Micro-filter made of chopped-strand nonwoven fabric. Filter replaceable without removing fitting The system can be equipped with pressure switch types GW A5, NB A, ÜB A as per DIN EN For further information, refer to data sheets Pressure switch for DUNGS multiple actuators 5.0 Servo pressure regulator with adjustable burner pressure, as per DIN EN 88 class A, group ; EN Gas-air ratio control with adjustable ratio V as well as correction of zero point N and firing chamber pressure connection Ratio V = p Br / p L = 0.4:1 3:1, other ratios on request possible Valves as per DIN EN 161 class A group ; fast closing, fast opening G 1/8 DIN ISO 8, at inlet and outlet flanges, on both sides downstream of filter, between V1 and V, downstream of V (fitting the pressure switch may partially exclude measuring gas connection) Downstream of valve V, pressure switch can be mounted on the side of the adapter G 1/8 connection as per DIN ISO 8 for burner pressure (pbr; GAS), blower pressure (pl; AIR), firing chamber pressure (pf; combustion, atmosphere) Pulse and connection lines must be made of steel and conform to PN1, DN4. Condensate of pulse and connection lines may not enter the fitting. Strictly follow the operating and mounting instructions. ~(AC) Hz 30 V -15 % +10 %, other voltages on request. Other preferred voltages: ~(AC) 100 V - 10 V, =(DC) 4 V - 8 V Plug-in connection as per DIN EN for valves at ~ (AC) 30 V; +0 C: see type overview 100 % duty 60 per hour (30 s on/off) IP 54 as per IEC 59 (EN 6059) Interference level N Materials of gas-conveying parts Housing Diaphragms Solenoid drive die-cast aluminium NBR basis steel, aluminium Installation position Vertical with upright solenoid or horizontal with horizontal solenoid, as well as their spacers 3 8

143 Dimensions [mm] MBC-300/700...VEF MBC VEF e = space required for replacing the solenoid Mounting the pulse lines MBC...VEF 1 p e : gas inlet pressure mbar 4 p Br : burner pressure, gas mbar optional: external pulse standard: internal pulse p F : firing chamber pressure -0 mbar +50 mbar or atmosphere 7 p L max. = p L - p F = 100 mbar p Br max. = p Br - p F = 100 mbar 7 p L : blower pressure, air mbar 4 8

144 Pulse lines Pulse lines 4, 6, 7 must be made of steel and correspond to DN 4 (diameter 4 mm), PN 1. Other pulse lines materials are permissible as per type test together with the burner. Route pulse lines in such a way that no condensate can flow into the MBC...VEF. Route pulse lines in such a way that they are protected against cracks and deformation. Keep pulse lines short. Type Version Order no. 30 VAC DN Rp Opening time a Dimensions [mm] b c d e f g Solenoid no. Switching ops/h Weight [kg] MBC-300-VEF / - 1 1/4 < 1 s /P 60 3,8 MBC-700-VEF < 1 s /P 60 6,5 MBC-100-VEF < 1 s /P 60 16,8 MBC-300-VEF MBC-700-VEF MBC-100-VEF P max. [VA] for t = 3 s P max. [VA] operation Flange for Rp/NPT Order no. Order no. MBC-300-VEF MBC-300-VEF MBC-300-VEF MBC-300-VEF Rp 1/ Rp 3/4 Rp 1 Rp 1 1/ Line socket 3 pole + PE MBC-700/100-VEF MBC-700/100-VEF MBC-700/100-VEF MBC-700/100-VEF Rp 1 Rp 1 1/4 Rp 1 1/ Rp Adapter, pressure gauge flange set G1/ Adapter GW A with G1/4 Adapter p Br Adapter GW A on flange MBC-300-VEF MBC-300-VEF MBC-300-VEF MBC-300-VEF NPT 1/ NPT 3/4 NPT 1 NPT 1 1/ Flanges, plug-in connection and system accessories must be ordered separately. MBC-700/100-VEF MBC-700/100-VEF MBC-700/100-VEF MBC-700/100-VEF NPT 1 NPT 1 1/4 NPT 1 1/ NPT

145 MBC...VEF key data Application 1 Application Gas Type of gas / specific density [kg/m 3 ] Volumetric flow V [m 3 /h] V min. V max. Inlet pressure p e [mbar] p e,min. p e,max. Burner pressure p Br [mbar] at V min. at V max. Blower pressure p L [mbar] at V min. at V max. Firing chamber pressure p F [mbar] at V min. at V max. Control range, output range Time taken to re-adjust air volume restrictors from small load to large load [s] Starting load [m 3 /h] Company / address Name / contact person Telephone f = V used Gas = Air density Density of gas used V Air x f Gas type Natural gas City gas Liquefied gas Air Density [kg/m 3 ] 0,81 0,58,08 1,4 dv 0,65 0,47 1,67 1,00 f 1,4 1,46 0,77 1,00 6 8

146 Volume flow pressure difference characteristics in steady state with microfilter. MBC-300-VEF Recommended operating range MBC (Rp 3/4) MBC (Rp 1/) MBC (Rp 1 & 1 1/4) Basis + 15 C, 1013 mbar, trocken Based on + 15 C, 1013 mbar, dry Base + 15 C, 1013 mbar, sec Base + 15 C, 1013 mbar, secco Vn [m 3/h] Luft / Air / Aria dv = 1, Vn [m 3/h] Erdgas/Natural gas/gaz Naturel/Gas metano dv = 0,65 Volume flow pressure difference characteristics in steady state with microfilter. MBC-700-VEF Recommended operating range MBC (Rp 1 1/4) MBC (Rp 1) MBC (Rp 1 1/ & ) Basis + 15 C, 1013 mbar, trocken Based on + 15 C, 1013 mbar, dry Base + 15 C, 1013 mbar, sec Base + 15 C, 1013 mbar, secco Vn [m 3/h] Luft / Air / Aria dv = 1, Vn [m 3/h] Erdgas/Natural gas/gaz Naturel/Gas metano dv = 0,65 7 8

147 GasMultiBloc Combined regulator and safety valve Infinitely variable air/gas ratio control mode MBC-300-VEF MBC-700-VEF MBC-100-VEF Volume flow pressure difference characteristics in steady state with microfilter. MBC-100-VEF Recommended operating range Basis + 15 C, 1013 mbar, trocken Based on + 15 C, 1013 mbar, dry Base + 15 C, 1013 mbar, sec Base + 15 C, 1013 mbar, secco We reserve the right to make changes in the interest of technical progress. 8 8

148 Double solenoid valve Combined pressure regulator and safety valves Infinitely variable operating mode MBC-...-VEF DN 65 - DN Technical Description The DUNGS multiple actuator MBC-...-VEF integrates valves and 1 gas-air ratio regulator in one compact unit: - Solenoid valves up to 500 mbar (50 kpa) as per DIN EN 161 Class A Group - Fine setting of gas and air pressure ratio - Servo pressure regulator as per DIN EN 88 class A group ; EN Internal stepping lines for optimised outlet pressure stability, external as an option. - Flange connection as per ISO Easy to install As this system has a modular design, we can offer individual solutions with valve testing system, mini/maxi pressure switch and pressure limiter. Despite the compact design, high flow rates can be achieved at low pressure difference. Application The gas-air ratio regulator permits optimal mixture formation in forced air burners and premix burners. This applies to modulating and two-stage variable operating modes. Suitable for gases belonging to gas families 1,, 3 and other inert gaseous media. Approvals EU type test approval as per EU Gas Appliance Directive. MBC-...-VEF CE-0085 BO 036 EU type test approval as per EU Pressure Equipment Directive: MBC-...-VEF CE0036 Approvals in other important gas-consuming countries. 1 8

149 Functional Description Gas flow 1. If the valves V1 and V are closed, chamber a is subjected to inlet pressure up to the double seat of the valve V1.. The min. pressure switch (option) is connected to chamber a via a bore hole. If the inlet pressure exceeds the desired value set on the pressure switch, the pressure switch connects through to the gas burner control system. 3. The valves V1 and V open after they are enabled by the gas burner control system. Gas flow through chambers a, b and c is enabled. Functional description of the combined valve-regulator unit at valve V1 A regulator (pressure regulator unit) with admission pressure compensation is integrated in valve V1. The plunger V1 is not connected to the valve disc unit. When the plunger opens, it preloads the compression spring and releases the regulator unit. When the plunger closes, the closing pressure is applied directly to the valve discs of the regulator unit. Valves V1 and V are driven together electrically. When valve V3 is in the closed position, it closes off the pressure chamber under the working diaphragm M so that this chamber is not affected by the inlet pressure p1 in chamber a. The plunger of valve V1 controls the valve V3. The pressure under the working diaphragm M depends on a variable flow cross-section D. The comparison diaphragms for burner pressure p Br and blower pressure p L are connected with a bar. The ratio V can be set by shifting the bearing point. The zero point compensation N acts on this bar. Ambient pressure p amb or firing chamber pressure p F must be applied to the opposite side of the comparison diaphragms. The firing chamber overpressure reduces the burner pressure when the ratio V > 1. If there are any changes in the equilibrium of forces, the flow cross-section D after the valve V4 is changed. The pressure under the working diaphragm is re-adjusted, and the valve disc unit V1 changes the free cross-section. Functional description valve V The plunger of the valve V is connected to the valve disc unit. When the plunger opens, it preloads the compression spring. The valve V opens completely without any delay. The valve V4 is actuated by the valve V. When the valve V4 is in the closed position, it closes off the area under the working Schematic diagram MBC-...-VEF V1 Main valve 1 V Main valve V3 Control valve 3 V4 Control valve 4 M D V N Pressure taps, gas train diagram MBC-...-VEF p1 Working diaphragm Restrictor Ratio setting Zero point compensation diaphragm M so that this area is not affected by the burner pressure. Closing function If there is an interruption in the power supply to the solenoid coils of the main valves V1 and V, they are closed by the compression springs in <1s. V3 MBC-1900-VEF (DMV 5065/1 S) mit Servo-Druckregler with servo pressure regulation avec réglage de pression servo con servo regolazione p a V1 V M b Gas/air ratio control p F V1 V3 3 3 a, b, c Pressure chambers in flow direction p 1 Inlet pressure p Br Burner pressure, outlet pressure Ambient pressure p amb V4 N V c D pbr pf pamb pl, 3, 4, 5 Screw plug G 1/8 1, 6 Screw plug G 1/4 7, 8, 9 Stepping line p Br, p F, p L V4 V p L p

150 Technical Data Nominal widths Max. operating overpressure Inlet pressure range Burner pressure range Guiding range Media Ambient temperature Dirt trap device Pressure switch Servo pressure regulator Ratio setting range V Zero point compensation N Solenoid valve V1, V Measuring gas connection Burner pressure monitoring device p Br Stepping line Voltage / frequency Electrical connection Power / current draw Switch-on duration Degree of protection DN Connection flanges as per EN for welding neck flanges as per DIN 633 (PN16) DN 65 - DN 100 Length as per DIN 30 part 1, series F mbar (50 kpa) p e : 15 mbar (1.5 kpa) to 360 mbar (36 kpa) p Br : 0,5 mbar (0.05 kpa) to 100 mbar (10 kpa) : 0,4 mbar (0.04 kpa) to 100 mbar (10 kpa) p L Gases belonging to gas families 1,, 3 and other inert gaseous media. -15 C to +60 C Filter. A suitable gas filter must be connected upstream. For further information, see data sheet 11.0 Gas and air filter. The system can be equipped with pressure switch types GW A5, ÜB A, NB A as per DIN EN In case of DN 65 GW A5 cannot be mounted on item. For further information, see data sheets 5.07 and 5.0 Pressure switches for DUNGS multiple actuators. Pressure regulator with admission pressure compensation, sealed with valve V1 when switched off, as per DIN EN 88 Class A Gas-air ratio regulator with adjustable ratio V as well as zero point compensation N and firing chamber pressure connection Ratio V = p Br / p L 0.75 : 1 3 : 1, other ratios on request possible Valve as per DIN EN 161 Class A Group ; fast-closing, fast-opening G 1/4 DIN ISO 8; at inlet and outlet flanges, G 1/8 on both sides after the filter, on both sides between V1 and V, after V (if the pressure switch is assembled, it may not be possible to install a measuring gas connection in some cases) after valve V G 1/8 connection as per DIN ISO 8 for burner pressure (p Br ; gas) Stepping and connection lines must be made of steel and PN1, DN4. Condensate from stepping and connection lines may not enter the fitting. The operating and assembly instructions must be strictly followed. ~ (AC) Hz 30 V -15 % +10 % Standard voltages: VAC, 4 8 VDC Plug-in connection as per DIN EN at ~ (AC) 30 V; +0 C: see type overview 100 % duty IP 54 as per IEC 59 (EN 6059) Material used for gas-conveying parts Housing Diaphragms, seals Solenoid drive cast aluminium NBR-based, Silopren (silicone rubber) aluminium, steel, brass Installation position Power / current draw at ~(AC) 30 V, + 0 C all indications are effective values Vertical with upright solenoid Type MBC MBC MBC Starting power approx. [W] x 95 x 15 x 15 Holding power approx. [W] x 0 x 5 x 5 Break-away starting current [A] x 0.54 x 0.54 x 0.54 Holding current [A] x 0.0 x 0.0 x

151 Dimensions MBC-...-VEF Type Ordering No. 30 VAC DN P max. I max. [W] ~[A] ~(AC) 30 V Opening time a b Dimensions [mm] c d e f Solenoid No. Switching operations/h Weight [kg] MBC-1900-VEF DN < 1 s /P MBC-3100-VEF DN < 1 s /P MBC-5000-VEF DN < 1 s /P

152 Characteristic curves for volume flow pressure difference in steady state with filter. A suitable gas filter must be used. must be checked and enabled in the application MBC-1900-VEF MBC Recommended operating range p [mbar] Basis + 15 C, 1013 mbar, trocken Based on + 15 C, 1013 mbar, dry Base + 15 C, 1013 mbar, sec Base + 15 C, 1013 mbar, secco Vn [m 3 /h] Luft / Air / Aria dv = 1, Vn [m 3 /h] Erdgas/Natural gas/gaz Naturel/Gas metano dv = 0, must be checked and enabled in the application MBC-3100-VEF MBC Recommended operating range p [mbar] Basis + 15 C, 1013 mbar, trocken Based on + 15 C, 1013 mbar, dry Base + 15 C, 1013 mbar, sec Base + 15 C, 1013 mbar, secco Vn [m 3 /h] Luft / Air / Aria dv = 1, Vn [m 3 /h] Erdgas/Natural gas/gaz Naturel/Gas metano dv = 0, f = V gas used = Air density Density of the gas used V air x f Gas type Natural gas Town gas Liquefied gas Air Density [kg/m 3 ] 0,81 0,58,08 1,4 f 1,4 1,46 0,77 1,00 5 8

153 Characteristic curves for volume flow pressure difference in steady state with filter. A suitable gas filter must be used. must be checked and enabled in the application MBC-5000-VEF Recommended operating range MBC-5000-VEF-100 p [mbar] Basis + 15 C, 1013 mbar, trocken Based on + 15 C, 1013 mbar, dry Base + 15 C, 1013 mbar, sec Base + 15 C, 1013 mbar, secco Vn [m 3 /h] Luft / Luft / Aria dv = 1, Vn [m 3 /h] Erdgas/Naturgas/Gaz Naturel/Gas metano dv = 0,65 mechanically open MBC-1900-VEF-65 MBC-3100-VEF-80 MBC-5000-VEF Basis + 15 C, 1013 mbar, trocken Based on + 15 C, 1013 mbar, dry Base + 15 C, 1013 mbar, sec Base + 15 C, 1013 mbar, secco Vn [m 3 /h] Luft / Air / Aria dv = 1, Vn [m 3 /h] Erdgas/Natural gas/gaz Naturel/Gas metano dv = 0,65 6 8

154 System accessories Pressure switch ÜB A, NB A4 GW A5 Gas filter GF/3 DN Valve testing system VPS 504 S04 Motorised butterfly valve DMK DN Line socket 3 pole + PE Adapter, pressure gauge flange set G1/ Ignition gas flange G 3/4 Cover, on the side Further information Data sheet 5.07 Data sheet 5.0 Data sheet 11.0 Data sheet 8.10 Data sheet Ordering no The DMV-VEF has been designed for direct assembly of DUNGS system accessories and supplementary equipment. Flanges, plug-in connection and system accessories must be ordered separately. 7 8

155 Double solenoid valve Combined pressure regulator and safety valves Infinitely variable operating mode MBC-...-VEF DN 65 - DN 100 Key data Key data MBC-...-VEF Application 1 Application Gas Type of gas / specific density [kg/m 3 ] Volumetric flow V [m 3 /h] V min. V max. Inlet pressure p e [mbar] p e,min. p e,max. Burner pressure p Br [mbar] at V min. at V max. Control range, power range Time taken to re-adjust volume restrictors from small load to large load [s] Starting load [m 3 /h] Company / address Name / person in charge Telephone We reserve the right to make changes in the interest of technical progress. 8 8

156 GasMultiBloc Combined regulator and safety shut-off valves Single-stage function MB-D(LE) B Technical description The DUNGS GasMultiBloc integrates filter, regulator, valves and pressure switches in one compact fitting. - Dirt trap: microfilter - One regulator and two valves: B01 - Two valves are fast opening - One valve is fast opening and one valve is slow opening - Solenoid valves up to 360 mbar (36 kpa) as per DIN EN 161 Class A Group - Sensitive setting of output pressure by proportional regulator as per DIN EN 88 Class A Group - High flow rates with low pressure drop - DC solenoid drive interference degree N - Main volume restrictor at valve V - Hydraulic opening delay - Flange connections with pipe threads as per ISO 7/1 - Simple mounting, compact, light-weight The modular system permits individual solutions by using external ignition gas tap in connection with separately controlled valves, by adding a valve proving system, mini/maxi pressure switches, pressure limiters, limit switch at valve V. Application The modular system permits individual solutions in gas safety and regulator engineering. Suitable for gases of families 1,, 3 and other neutral gaseous media. Approvals EU type test approval as per EU Gas Appliance Directive. MB B01 CE-0085 AP 3156 EC type test approval as per EC Pressure Equipment Directive: MB B01 CE0036 Approvals in other important gas consuming countries. 1 6

157 Functional description of gas flow 1. When the valves V1 and V are closed, chamber A is under inlet pressure.. A hole D in the filter housing connects min. pressure switch with chamber A. If the inlet pressure applied to the pressure switch exceeds the incoming reference value, it switches through to the automatic burner control. 3. After release by the automatic burner control, valves V1 and V open. The gas flows through chambers A, B and C of the GasMultiBloc. Operating method of valve-regulator combination on valve V1 A regulator, compensating for residual pressure is integrated in valve V1 (pressure regulating part). Armature 7 is not connected with valve plate unit 3. When it opens, armature 8 pretensions compression spring (V1) 5 and releases the valve plate unit. When the valve closes, the armature acts directly on the valve plate unit. The output pressure upstream of valve V is defined by pretensioning regulating spring 8 (tension spring) via setting screw 17. The output pressure acts via opening E on the working diaphragm 1 of the regulator part. In regulated state, setting spring inlet pressure and pressure of working diaphragm are in force equilibrium. The compensating diaphragm ensures the fast closing function of valve V1 and a high regulating quality. Operating method of valve V The armature 14 of valve V is connected to valve plate unit 1. When it opens, armature 14 pretensions the closing spring 13. The max. valve opening can be set by limiting the armature stroke by means of the main volume restrictor 18. Min. opening (residual stroke) of valve (0.5 to 1.0 mm) The main volume restrictor 18 is set by rotating the adjusting plate or the hydraulic brake 0. The fast and/or slow opening characteristic is influenced by setting fast stroke 19 at the hydraulic brake under the cover. Closing function When the supply voltage to the solenoid coils of valves V1 and V is interrupted, they are closed within < 1 s by the compression springs. Sectional drawing of MB-DLE... 1 Pressure regulator Microfilter 3 Valve V1 4 Connection flange 5 Closing spring V1 6 Housing 7 Armature V1 8 Regulating spring Pressure taps 0 3 pa , 1,, 3, 4, 5 screw plug G 1/8 Electrical connection S 0/S 50 S /S 5 p 1 p AV1 V C p e 9 Solenoid V1 10 Gas pressure switch 11 Electrical connection 1 Valve V 13 Closing spring V 14 Armature V 15 Solenoid V 16 Solenoid housing 4 pbr p e 3 pa 4 pbr P L 3 D MP N P1 L1 MP N V1 B E P1 L1 V P1 L1 0 Setting: 17 - Gas pressure p a 18 - Main volume 19 - Fast stroke 0 Hydraulic brake 1 Working diaphragm Compensation diaphragm Mp N Mp N P L P1 L1 6

158 Specifications Nominal diameters Flange with pipe threads as per ISO 7/1 (DIN 999) Max. operating pressure MB-D 415 B01 Rp 1, 1 1/4,1 1/, and their combinations 360 mbar (36 kpa) MB-D 40 B01 Rp 1, 1 1/4, 1 1/, and their combinations Output pressure ranges Media Ambient temperature Dirt trap Pressure switches Pressure regulator Solenoid valve V1 Solenoid valve V MB- S0/S p a : 4 mbar (0.4 kpa) to 0 mbar ( kpa) MB- S50/S5 p a : 0 mbar ( kpa) to 50 mbar (5 kpa) Gases of families 1,, 3 and other neutral gaseous media -15 C to +70 C (Do not operate MB-D below 0 C in liquid gas systems. Only suitable for gaseous liquid gas, liquid hydrocarbons destroy sealing materials.) Sieve, microfilter, changing the filter is possible without removing the valve. Types GW A5, ÜB A / NB A to DIN EN 1854 may be attached. For further information, refer to Datasheets 5.0 and 5.07 Pressure Switches for DUNGS Multiple Actuators Pressure regulator compensated for residual pressure, leakproof seal when switched off by means of valve V1 as per DIN EN 88 Class A. Setpoint spring permanently installed (no spring exchange possible). A vent line above roof is not required. Internal pulse tap provided. Valve as per DIN EN 161 Class A Group, fast closing, fast opening Valve as per DIN EN 161 Class A Group Valve V design Main volume restrictor MB fast closing fast opening without MB-D fast closing fast opening with MB-DLE fast closing slowly opening with MB-LE fast closing slowly opening without Measuring / Ignition gas connection Burner pressure monitor p Br Voltage / Frequency Electrical connection Rating / Power consumption Switch-on duration Degree of protection Radio interference For G 1/8 as per DIN ISO 8, refer to Pressure taps on page Connection downstream of valve V, pressure switch mountable on adapter laterally Hz 0-30 V AC -15 % +10 % Other preferred voltages: 40 VAC, VAC, 48 VDC, 4-8 VDC Plug connection as per DIN EN for valves and pressure switches at 30 V AC; +0 C: refer to Dimensions on page 5 100% IP 54 as per IEC 59 (EN 6059) Interference degree N Materials of gas conveying parts Housing Diaphragms, seals Solenoid drive aluminium die casting NBR basis, Silopren (silicone rubber) steel, brass, aluminium Installation position Closed position signal contact Solenoid vertically upright or lying horizontally as well as its intermediate positions. Closed position signal contact, type K01/1 (DIN-tested), mountable on V 3 6

159 Equipment variants GasMultiBloc...B01 Single-stage function MB MB-D MB-DLE MB-LE Microfilter Gas pressure switch downstream of filter downstream of valve V on adapter Pressure regulator Valve V1, double seat Valve V, double seat Valves opening together Valves opening separately Flange Rp 1 Rp 1 1/4 Rp 1 1/ Rp 415 B01 40 B01 Filter element can be removed. A suitable GF.../1 gas filter must then be fitted upstream. = possible () = on request - = not possible MB-...B01 version V1 = Valve 1 V = Valve 3 = Filter 4 = Pressure switch, optional 5 = Regulator Mounting of VPS 504 valve proving system possible Mounting of K01/1 closed position signal contact possible 3 4 V1 5 V For further information, refer to Datasheet 7.04: GasMultiBloc Modular System, Accessories, Additional equipment Type key of MultiBloc 0 = common = separated = 4-0 mbar up to 360 mbar 5 = 4-50 mbar up to 360 mbar 1 = two A valves for main gas + regulator 7 = two A valves for main gas, one A valve together with V1 as internal bypass around V + regulator 403 = DN 10, V = Single-seat valve 405 = DN 15, V = Single-seat valve 407 = DN 0, V = Double-seat valve 410 = DN 5, V = Single-seat valve 41 = DN 3, V = Double-seat valve 415 = DN 40, V = Double-seat valve 40 = DN 50, V = Double-seat valve without = (MB or MB-ZR) -D = Main volume restrictor -LE = adjustable opening behaviour -DLE = D + LE combination without = single stage ZR = double-stage with partial volume setting first stage 4 6

160 Dimensions [mm] Type Rp Opening time Nominal rating[va] ~(AC) 30 V AC; +0 C S0 S S50 S5 Weight [kg] MB-D 415 B01 MB-DLE 415 B01 MB-D 40 B01 MB-DLE 40 B01 Rp 1 - Rp 1 - Rp 1 - Rp 1 - < 1 s < 0 s < 1 s < 0 s

161 GasMultiBloc Combined regulator and safety shut off valves Single-stage function MB-D(LE) B01 Volumetric flow pressure loss characteristics in regulated state with microfilter p = 3 mbar Br MB- 415 S0/S p = 0 mbar Br MB- 415 S50/S5 p = 3 mbar Br MB- 40 S0/S p = 0 mbar Br MB- 40 S50/S Recommended working range p [mbar] MB-DLE/ZR 415 B01 S Rp 1 1/ MB-DLE/ZR 40 B01 S 5 Rp 3 1 Basis + 15 C, 1013 mbar, trocken Based on + 15 C, 1013 mbar, dry Base + 15 C, 1013 mbar, sec Base + 15 C, 1013 mbar, secco 0,1 0, 0,3 0,4 0,50,6 0, Vn [m 3 /h] Luft / Air / Aria dv = 1,00 0, 0,3 0,4 0,50,6 0, Vn [m 3 /h] Erdgas/Natural gas/gaz Naturel/Gas metano dv = 0,65 f = Dichte Luft Spec. weight air poids spécifique de l'air peso specifico aria Dichte des verwendeten Gases Spec. weight of gas used poids spécifique du gaz utilisé peso specifico del gas utilizzato Gas type Nat. gas City gas LPG Air Density [kg/m 3 ] dv f V verwendetes Gas/gas used/ gaz utilisé/gas utilizzato = V Luft/air/air/aria x f We reserve the right to make any changes in the interest of technical progress. 6 6

162 GasMultiBloc Combined regulator and safety shut-off valves Two-stage function MB-ZRD(LE) B Technical description The DUNGS GasMultiBloc integrates filter, regulator, valves and pressure switches in one compact fitting. - Dirt trap: microfilter - One regulator and two main valves: B01 - One one-stage valve and one two-stage valve - One valve is fast opening, one valve is slow or fast opening - Solenoid valves up to 360 mbar (36 kpa) as per DIN EN 161 Class A Group - Sensitive setting of output pressure by proportional regulator as per DIN EN 88 Class A Group - High flow rates with low pressure drop - DC solenoid drive interference degree N - Main volume restrictor and partial volume restrictor at valve V - Hydraulic opening delay - Flange connections with pipe threads as per ISO 7/1 - Simple mounting, compact, light-weight The modular system permits individual solutions by using external ignition gas tap in connection with separately controlled valves, by adding a valve proving system, mini/maxi pressure switches, pressure limiters, limit switch and closing stroke limiter at valve V, regulator blocking for liquid gas applications. Application The modular system permits individual solutions in gas safety and regulator engineering. Suitable for gases of families 1,, 3 and other neutral gaseous media. Approvals EC type test approval as per EC Gas Appliance Directive: MB-ZR B01 CE-0085 AP 3156 EC type test approval as per EC Pressure Equipment Directive: MB-ZR B01 CE0036 Approvals in other important gas consuming countries. 1 6

163 Functional description of gas flow 1. When the valves V1 and V are closed, chamber A is under inlet pressure.. A hole D in the filter housing connects min. pressure switch with chamber A. If the inlet pressure applied to the pressure switch exceeds the incoming reference value, it switches through to the automatic burner control. 3. After release by the automatic burner control, valve V1 and stage 1 of valve V open. The gas flows through chambers A, B and C of the GasMultiBloc. 4. On request, the second stage of valve V opens. Operating method of valve-regulator combination on valve V1 A regulator compensating for residual pressure is integrated in valve V1 (pressure regulating part). Armature 8 is not connected to valve plate unit 3. When it opens, armature 8 pretensions compression spring (V1) 5 and releases the valve plate unit. When the valve closes, the armature acts directly on the valve plate unit. The output pressure upstream P Mp of Pvalve V is defined by L N L pretensioning regulating spring 7 (tension spring) via setting screw 18. The output pressure acts via opening E on the working diaphragm of the regulator part. In regulated state, setting spring inlet pressure and pressure of working diaphragm are in force equilibrium. The compensating diaphragm ensures the fast closing function of valve V1 and a high regulating quality. Sectional drawing of MB-ZRDLE P1 L1 P L 1 Pressure regulator Microfilter 3 Valve V1 4 Connection flange 5 Closing spring V1 6 Housing 7 Regulating spring 8 Armature V1 9 Solenoid V1 D V1 V/ V/1 p 1 A B C Mp N E 10 Gas pressure switch 11 Electrical connection 1 Valve V 13 Closing spring V 14 Armature V (1st stage) 15 Solenoid V (1st stage) 16 Armature V (nd stage) 17 Solenoid V (nd stage) p Setting: 18 - Gas pressure p a 19 - Partial volume, 1st stage 0 - Main volume 1 - Fast stroke Working diaphragm 3 Compensation diaphragm Operating method of valve V P1 Mp P Armature L1 14 of N valve L V is connected to valve plate unit 1. When it opens, armature 14 pretensions closing spring 13. The valve opening of stage 1 can be set by limiting the armature stroke by means of the main volume restrictor 19. Min. opening (residual stroke) of valve (0.5 to 1.0 mm) N L Mp P When the second stage of valve opens, closing spring 13 is continuously pretensioned. The maximum valve opening of stage can be set by limiting the armature stroke of armature 16 using the main volume restrictor. Main volume restrictor 0 is set by rotating the adjusting plate or the hydraulic brake. The fast and/or slow opening characteristic acts on both stages. It is influenced by setting the fast stroke at the hydraulic brake under the cover. Pressure taps 0 3 pe 4 pa 5 pbr pe 4 pa 5 pbr 0 Filter cover 1, 3, 4, 6 G 1/8 screw plug Test nipple 5 M4 screwed sealing plug Electrical connection P L P1 L1 0 Mp N P L P L 43 5 Mp N 6 Closing function When the supply voltage to the solenoid coils of valves V1 and V is interrupted, they are closed within < 1 s by the compression springs. P L P L 3 Mp MP N N P1 L1 1 P L P1 L1 1 P L 3 Mp N P1 L1 Mp N P L MP N N Mp L P 1 P L 3 P1 L1 P1 L1 Valves V1, V 1st stage Mp N P L Valve V nd stage 0 N Mp L P 3 p e 4 pa 5 pbr 6

164 Specifications Nominal diameters Flange with pipe threads as per ISO 7/1 (DIN 999) Max. operating pressure MB-ZR 405/407 B01 Rp 1/, 3/4 and their combinations 360 mbar (36 kpa) MB-ZR 410/41 B01 Rp 3/4, 1, 1 1/4 and their combinations Output pressure ranges Media Ambient temperature Dirt trap Pressure switches Pressure regulator Solenoid valve V1 Solenoid valve V MB- S0/S p a : 4 mbar (0.4 kpa) to 0 mbar ( kpa) MB- S50/S5 p a : 4 mbar (0.4 kpa) to 50 mbar (5 kpa) Gases of families 1,, 3 and other neutral gaseous media -15 C to +70 C (Do not operate MB-D below 0 C in liquid gas systems. Only suitable for gaseous liquid gas, liquid hydrocarbons destroy sealing materials.) Sieve, microfilter, changing the filter is possible without removing the valve. Types GW A5, ÜB A / NB A to DIN EN 1854 may be attached. For further information, refer to Datasheets 5.0 and 5.07 Pressure Switches for DUNGS Multiple Actuators Pressure regulator compensated for residual pressure, leakproof seal when switched off by means of valve V1 as per DIN EN 88 Class A. Setpoint spring permanently installed (no spring exchange possible). A vent line above roof is not required. Internal pulse tap provided. Valve as per DIN EN 161 Class A Group, fast closing, fast opening Valve as per DIN EN 161 Class A Group, fast closing Valve V design Partial volume restrictor Main volume restrictor MB-ZR fast opening with without MB-ZRD fast opening with with MB-ZRDLE slow opening with with MB-ZRLE slow opening with without Measuring / Ignition gas connection Burner pressure monitor p Br Voltage / Frequency Electrical connection Rating / Power consumption Switch-on duration Degree of protection Radio interference For G 1/8 as per DIN ISO 8, refer to Pressure taps on page Connection downstream of valve V, pressure switch A mountable on adapter laterally Hz 0-30 V AC -15 % +10 % Other preferred voltages: 40 V AC, V AC, 48 VDC, 4-8 VDC Plug connection as per DIN EN for valves and pressure switches Refer to Dimensions on page % IP 54 as per IEC 59 (EN 6059) Interference degree N Materials of gas conveying parts Housing Diaphragms, seals Solenoid drive aluminium die casting NBR basis, Silopren (silicone rubber) steel, brass, aluminium Installation position Closed position signal contact Solenoid vertically upright or lying horizontally as well as its intermediate positions. Closed position signal contact, type K01/1 (DIN-tested), mountable on V 3 6

165 Equipment variants GasMultiBloc...B01 Two-stage function MB-ZR MB-ZRD MB-ZRDLE MB-ZRLE Microfilter with sieve Gas pressure switch downstream of filter downstream of valve V on adapter laterally Pressure regulator Valve V1, double seat Valve V, single seat Valve V, double seat Valves opening together Valves opening separately Flange Rp 1/ Rp 3/4 Rp 1 Rp 1 1/4 405 B B B01 41 B01 S 0, S 50 S, S 5 = possible () = on request - = not possible MB-ZR...B01 version V1 = Valve 1 V = Valve 3 = Dirt trap 4 = Pressure switch 5 = Regulator 3 4 V1 5 V Mounting of VPS 504 valve proving system possible Mounting of K01/1 closed position signal contact possible Type key of MultiBloc 0 = common = separated = 4-0 mbar up to 360 mbar 5 = 4-50 mbar up to 360 mbar 1 = two A valves for main gas + regulator 7 = two A valves for main gas, one A valve together with V1 as internal bypass around V + regulator 403 = DN 10, V = Single-seat valve 405 = DN 15, V = Single-seat valve 407 = DN 0, V = Double-seat valve 410 = DN 5, V = Single-seat valve 41 = DN 3, V = Double-seat valve 415 = DN 40, V = Double-seat valve 40 = DN 50, V = Double-seat valve without = (MB or MB-ZR) -D = Main volume restrictor -LE = adjustable opening behaviour -DLE = D + LE combination without = single stage ZR = double-stage with partial volume setting first stage 4 6

166 Dimensions [mm] d = Space requirement for cover of pressure switch k = Space requirement for exchanging the solenoid l = Space requirement for K01/1 closed position signal contact Type Rp Opening time a b c Dimensions [mm] d e f g h i k l Weight [kg] MB-ZRD 405/407 B01 MB-ZRDLE 405/407 B01 MB-ZRD 410/41 B01 MB-ZRDLE 410/41 B01 Rp 1/ Rp 3/4 Rp 1 Rp 1 1/4 < 1 s < 0 s < 1 s < 0 s Rating/power consumption [VA] 30 V AC; +0 C: MB-ZR 405/407 S 0 MB-ZR 405/407 S 50 MB-ZR 405/407 S MB-ZR 405/407 S 5 MB-ZR 410/41 S 0 MB-ZR 410/41 S 50 MB-ZR 410/41 S MB-ZR 410/41 S

167 GasMultiBloc Combined regulator and safety shut-off valves Two-stage function MB-ZRD(LE) B01 Volumetric flow pressure loss characteristics in regulated state with microfilter MB-405 S0, S MB-405 S50, S5 MB-407 S0, S MB-410 S0, S MB-407 S50, S5 MB-410 S50, S5 MB-41 S0, S MB-41 S50, S p = 3 mbar Br Recommended operating range p [mbar] V min. MB-ZR(DLE) 405 /407 V min. MB-ZR(DLE) 410 /41 MB-ZR(DLE) 405 Rp 1/ - Rp 1/ MB-ZR(DLE) 407 Rp 3/4 - Rp 3/4 MB-ZR(DLE) 410 Rp 1 - Rp 1 MB-ZR(DLE) 41 Rp 5/4 - Rp 5/4 1 Basis + 15 C, 1013 mbar, trocken Based on + 15 C, 1013 mbar, dry Base + 15 C, 1013 mbar, sec Base + 15 C, 1013 mbar, secco 0,1 0, 0,3 0,4 0,50,6 0, Vn [m 3 /h] Luft / Air / Aria dv = 1,00 0, 0,3 0,4 0,50,6 0, Vn [m 3 /h] Erdgas/Natural gas/gaz Naturel/Gas metano dv = 0,65 f = Dichte Luft Spec. weight air poids spécifique de l'air peso specifico aria Dichte des verwendeten Gases Spec. weight of gas used poids spécifique du gaz utilisé peso specifico del gas utilizzato Gas type Nat. gas City gas LPG Air Density [kg/m 3 ] dv f V verwendetes Gas/gas used/ gaz utilisé/gas utilizzato = V Luft/air/air/aria x f We reserve the right to make any changes in the interest of technical progress. 6 6

168 GasMultiBloc Combined regulator and safety shut-off valves Two-stage function MB-ZRD(LE) B Technical description The DUNGS GasMultiBloc integrates filter, regulator, valves and pressure switches in one compact fitting. - Dirt trap: microfilter - One regulator and two main valves: B01 - One one-stage valve and one two-stage valve - One valve is fast opening, one valve is slow or fast opening - Solenoid valves up to 360 mbar (36 kpa) as per DIN EN 161 Class A Group - Sensitive setting of output pressure by proportional regulator as per DIN EN 88 Class A Group - High flow rates with low pressure drop - DC solenoid drive interference degree N - Main volume restrictor and partial volume restrictor at valve V - Hydraulic opening delay - Flange connections with pipe threads as per ISO 7/1 - Simple mounting, compact, light-weight The modular system permits individual solutions by using external ignition gas tap in connection with separately controlled valves, by adding a valve proving system, mini/maxi pressure switches, pressure limiters, limit switch at valve V. Application The modular system permits individual solutions in gas safety and regulator engineering. Suitable for gases of families 1,, 3 and other neutral gaseous media. Approvals EC type test approval as per EC Gas Appliance Directive: MB-ZR B01 CE-0085 AP 3156 EC type test approval as per EC Pressure Equipment Directive: MB-ZR B01 CE0036 Approvals in other important gas consuming countries.

169 Functional description of gas flow 1. When the valves V1 and V are closed, chamber A is under inlet pressure.. A hole D in the filter housing connects min. pressure switch with chamber A. If the inlet pressure applied to the pressure switch exceeds the incoming reference value, it switches through to the automatic burner control. 3. After release by the automatic burner control, valves V1 and V open. The gas flows through chambers A, B and C of the GasMultiBloc. 4. On request, the second stage of valve V opens. Sectional drawing of MB-ZRDLE V/ Operating method of valve-regulator combination on valve V1 A regulator, compensating for residual pressure is integrated in valve V1 (pressure regulating part). Armature 8 is not connected to valve plate unit 3. When it opens, armature 8 pretensions compression spring (V1) 5 and releases the valve plate unit. When the valve closes, the armature acts directly on the valve plate unit. The output pressure upstream of valve V is defined by pretensioning regulating spring 7 (tension spring) via setting screw 18. The output pressure acts via opening E on the working diaphragm of the regulator part. In regulated state, setting spring inlet pressure and pressure of working diaphragm are in force equilibrium. The compensating diaphragm 3 ensures the fast closing function of valve V1 and a high regulating quality Pressure regulator Microfilter 3 Valve V1 4 Connection flange 5 Closing spring V1 6 Housing 7 Regulating spring 8 Armature V1 9 Solenoid V1 D p 1 p AV1 V C V1 10 Gas pressure switch 11 Electrical connection 1 Valve V 13 Closing spring V 14 Armature V (1st stage) 15 Solenoid V (1st stage) 16 Armature V (nd stage) 17 Solenoid V (nd stage) 18 Electrical connection B E V V/ Setting: 19 - Gas pressure p a 0 - Partial volume, 1st stage 1 - Main volume - Fast stroke 3 Working diaphragm 4 Compensation diaphragm Operating method of valve V Armature 14 of valve V is connected to valve plate unit 11. When it opens, armature 14 pretensions closing spring 13. The valve opening of stage 1 can be set by limiting the armature stroke by means of main volume restrictor 19. Min. opening (residual stroke) of valve (0.5 to 1.0 mm) If the second stage of valve opens, closing spring 13 is continuously pretensioned. The maximum valve opening of stage can be set by limiting the armature stroke of armature 16 by means of the main volume restrictor. Main volume restrictor 0 is set by rotating the adjusting plate or the hydraulic brake. The fast and/or slow opening characteristic acts on both stages. It is influenced by setting the fast stroke at the hydraulic brake under the cover. Closing function When the supply voltage to the solenoid coils of valves V1 and V is interrupted, they are closed within < 1 s by the compression springs. Pressure taps 1 5 0, 1,, 3, 4, 5 G 1/8 screw plug Electrical connection S 0/S p e p a p Br 3 4 p e p a p Br P L 3 MP N P1 L P1 L1 P L Mp N 5 S /S 5 P1 L1 Mp N P L MP N N Mp L P 1 P L 3 P1 L1 Valves V1, V 1st stage Valve V nd stage N Mp L P 6

170 Specifications Nominal diameters Flange with pipe threads as per ISO 7/1 (DIN 999) Max. operating pressure MB-ZR 415 B01 Rp 1, 1 1/4, 1 1/, and their combinations 360 mbar (36 kpa) MB-ZR 40 B01 Rp 1, 1 1/4, 1 1/, and their combinations Output pressure ranges Media Ambient temperature Dirt trap Pressure switches Pressure regulator Solenoid valve V1 Solenoid valve V MB-ZR S0/S p a : 4 mbar (0.4 kpa) to 0 mbar ( kpa) MB-ZR S50/S5 p a : 0 mbar ( kpa) to 50 mbar (5 kpa) Gases of families 1,, 3 and other neutral gaseous media -15 C to +70 C (Do not operate MB-ZR below 0 C in liquid gas systems. Only suitable for gaseous liquid gas, liquid hydrocarbons destroy sealing materials.) Sieve, microfilter, changing the filter is possible without removing the valve. Types GW A5, ÜB A / NB A to DIN EN 1854 may be attached. For further information, refer to Datasheets 5.0 and 5.07 Pressure Switches for DUNGS Multiple Actuators Pressure regulator compensated for residual pressure, leakproof seal when switched off by means of valve V1 as per DIN EN 88 Class A. Setpoint spring permanently installed (no spring exchange possible). A vent line above roof is not required. Internal pulse tap provided. Valve as per DIN EN 161 Class A Group, fast closing, fast opening Valve as per DIN EN 161 Class A Group, fast closing Valve V design Partial volume restrictor Main volume restrictor MB-ZR fast opening with without MB-ZRD fast opening with with MB-ZRDLE slowly opening with with MB-ZRLE slowly opening with without Measuring / Ignition gas connection Burner pressure monitor p Br Voltage / Frequency Electrical connection Rating / Power consumption Switch-on duration Degree of protection Radio interference For G 1/8 as per DIN ISO 8, refer to Pressure taps on page Connection downstream of valve V, pressure switch mountable on adapter laterally Hz, 0-30 V AC, -15 % +10 % Other preferred voltages: 40 VAC, VAC, 48 VDC, 4-8 VDC Plug connection as per DIN EN for valves and pressure switches Refer to Dimensions on page % IP 54 as per IEC 59 (EN 6059) Interference degree N Materials of gas conveying parts Housing Diaphragms, seals Solenoid drive aluminium die casting NBR basis, Silopren (silicone rubber) steel, brass, aluminium Installation position Closed position signal contact Solenoid vertically upright or lying horizontally as well as its intermediate positions. Closed position signal contact, type K01/1 (DIN-tested), mountable to V 3 6

171 Equipment variants GasMultiBloc...B01 Two-stage function MB-ZR MB-ZRD MB-ZRDLE MB-ZRLE Microfilter (standard) with sieve Gas pressure switch downstream of filter downstream of valve V on adapter laterally Pressure regulator Valve V1, double seat Valve V, double seat Valves opening together Valves opening separately Flange Rp 1 Rp 1 1/4 Rp 1 1/ Rp 415 B01 40 B01 Filter element can be removed. A suitable GF.../1 gas filter must then be fitted upstream. S 0, S 50 S, S 5 = possible () = on request - = not possible MB-ZR...B01 design V1 = Valve 1 V = Valve 3 = Filter 4 = Pressure switch 5 = Regulator 4 Mounting of VPS 504 valve proving system possible Mounting of K01/1 closed position signal contact possible 3 V1 5 V Type key of MultiBloc 0 = common = separated = 4-0 mbar up to 360 mbar 5 = 4-50 mbar up to 360 mbar 1 = two A valves for main gas + regulator 7 = two A valves for main gas, one A valve together with V1 as internal bypass around V + regulator 403 = DN 10, V = Single-seat valve 405 = DN 15, V = Single-seat valve 407 = DN 0, V = Double-seat valve 410 = DN 5, V = Single-seat valve 41 = DN 3, V = Double-seat valve 415 = DN 40, V = Double-seat valve 40 = DN 50, V = Double-seat valve without = (MB or MB-ZR) -D = Main volume restrictor -LE = adjustable opening behaviour -DLE = D + LE combination without = single stage ZR = double-stage with partial volume setting first stage 4 6

172 Dimensions [mm] MB-DLE 415 = 350 MB-DLE 40 = 407 A 40 MB-DLE 415 =70 MB-DLE 40 = 330 MB-DLE 415 = 350 MB-DLE 40 = Rp 1, 1 1/4 = 56 Rp 1 1/, = 83 Type Rp Opening time Nominal rating [VA] 30 V AC; +0 C S0 S50 S S5 Weight [kg] MB-ZRD 415 B01 MB-ZRDLE 415 B01 MB-ZRD 40 B01 MB-ZRDLE 40 B01 Rp 1 - Rp 1 - Rp 1 - Rp 1 - < 1 s < 0 s < 1 s < 0 s ,

173 GasMultiBloc Combined regulator and safety shut-off valves Two-stage function MB-ZRD(LE) B01 Volumetric flow pressure loss characteristics in regulated state with microfilter p = 3 mbar Br MB- 415 S0/S p = 0 mbar Br MB- 415 S50/S5 p = 3 mbar Br MB- 40 S0/S p = 0 mbar Br MB- 40 S50/S Recommended working range MB-DLE/ZR 415 B01 S Rp 1 1/ MB-DLE/ZR 40 B01 S 5 Rp 1 Basis + 15 C, 1013 mbar, trocken Based on + 15 C, 1013 mbar, dry Base + 15 C, 1013 mbar, sec Base + 15 C, 1013 mbar, secco 0,1 0, 0,3 0,4 0,50,6 0, Vn [m 3 /h] Luft / Air / Aria dv = 1,00 0, 0,3 0,4 0,50,6 0, Vn [m 3 /h] Erdgas/Natural gas/gaz Naturel/Gas metano dv = 0,65 f = Dichte Luft Spec. weight air poids spécifique de l'air peso specifico aria Dichte des verwendeten Gases Spec. weight of gas used poids spécifique du gaz utilisé peso specifico del gas utilizzato Gas type Nat. gas City gas LPG Air Density [kg/m 3 ] dv f V verwendetes Gas/gas used/ gaz utilisé/gas utilizzato = V Luft/air/air/aria x f We reserve the right to make any changes in the interest of technical progress. 6 6

174 GasMultiBloc Combined regulator and safety shut-off valves Two-stage function MB-ZRD(LE) B Technical description The DUNGS GasMultiBloc integrates filter, regulator, valves and pressure switches in one compact fitting. - Dirt trap: microfilter - One regulator and two main valves: B01 - One one-stage valve and one two-stage valve - One valve is fast opening, one valve is slow or fast opening - Solenoid valves up to 360 mbar (36 kpa) as per DIN EN 161 Class A Group - Sensitive setting of output pressure by proportional regulator as per DIN EN 88 Class A Group - High flow rates with low pressure drop - DC solenoid drive interference degree N - Main volume restrictor and partial volume restrictor at valve V - Hydraulic opening delay - Flange connections with pipe threads as per ISO 7/1 - Simple mounting, compact, light-weight The modular system permits individual solutions by using external ignition gas tap in connection with separately controlled valves, by adding a valve proving system, mini/maxi pressure switches, pressure limiters, limit switch and closing stroke limiter at valve V, regulator blocking for liquid gas applications. Application The modular system permits individual solutions in gas safety and regulator engineering. Suitable for gases of families 1,, 3 and other neutral gaseous media. Approvals EC type test approval as per EC Gas Appliance Directive: MB-ZR B01 CE-0085 AP 3156 EC type test approval as per EC Pressure Equipment Directive: MB-ZR B01 CE0036 Approvals in other important gas consuming countries. 1 6

175 Functional description of gas flow 1. When the valves V1 and V are closed, chamber A is under inlet pressure.. A hole D in the filter housing connects min. pressure switch with chamber A. If the inlet pressure applied to the pressure switch exceeds the incoming reference value, it switches through to the automatic burner control. 3. After release by the automatic burner control, valve V1 and stage 1 of valve V open. The gas flows through chambers A, B and C of the GasMultiBloc. 4. On request, the second stage of valve V opens. Operating method of valve-regulator combination on valve V1 A regulator compensating for residual pressure is integrated in valve V1 (pressure regulating part). Armature 8 is not connected to valve plate unit 3. When it opens, armature 8 pretensions compression spring (V1) 5 and releases the valve plate unit. When the valve closes, the armature acts directly on the valve plate unit. The output pressure upstream P Mp of Pvalve V is defined by L N L pretensioning regulating spring 7 (tension spring) via setting screw 18. The output pressure acts via opening E on the working diaphragm of the regulator part. In regulated state, setting spring inlet pressure and pressure of working diaphragm are in force equilibrium. The compensating diaphragm ensures the fast closing function of valve V1 and a high regulating quality. Sectional drawing of MB-ZRDLE P1 L1 P L 1 Pressure regulator Microfilter 3 Valve V1 4 Connection flange 5 Closing spring V1 6 Housing 7 Regulating spring 8 Armature V1 9 Solenoid V1 D V1 V/ V/1 p 1 A B C Mp N E 10 Gas pressure switch 11 Electrical connection 1 Valve V 13 Closing spring V 14 Armature V (1st stage) 15 Solenoid V (1st stage) 16 Armature V (nd stage) 17 Solenoid V (nd stage) p Setting: 18 - Gas pressure p a 19 - Partial volume, 1st stage 0 - Main volume 1 - Fast stroke Working diaphragm 3 Compensation diaphragm Operating method of valve V P1 Mp P Armature L1 14 of N valve L V is connected to valve plate unit 1. When it opens, armature 14 pretensions closing spring 13. The valve opening of stage 1 can be set by limiting the armature stroke by means of the main volume restrictor 19. Min. opening (residual stroke) of valve (0.5 to 1.0 mm) N L Mp P When the second stage of valve opens, closing spring 13 is continuously pretensioned. The maximum valve opening of stage can be set by limiting the armature stroke of armature 16 using the main volume restrictor. Main volume restrictor 0 is set by rotating the adjusting plate or the hydraulic brake. The fast and/or slow opening characteristic acts on both stages. It is influenced by setting the fast stroke at the hydraulic brake under the cover. Pressure taps 0 3 pe 4 pa 5 pbr pe 4 pa 5 pbr 0 Filter cover 1, 3, 4, 6 G 1/8 screw plug Test nipple 5 M4 screwed sealing plug Electrical connection P L P1 L1 0 Mp N P L P L 43 5 Mp N 6 Closing function When the supply voltage to the solenoid coils of valves V1 and V is interrupted, they are closed within < 1 s by the compression springs. P L P L 3 Mp MP N N P1 L1 1 P L P1 L1 1 P L 3 Mp N P1 L1 Mp N P L MP N N Mp L P 1 P L 3 P1 L1 P1 L1 Valves V1, V 1st stage Mp N P L Valve V nd stage 0 N Mp L P 3 p e 4 pa 5 pbr 6

176 Specifications Nominal diameters Flange with pipe threads as per ISO 7/1 (DIN 999) Max. operating pressure MB-ZR 405/407 B01 Rp 1/, 3/4 and their combinations 360 mbar (36 kpa) MB-ZR 410/41 B01 Rp 3/4, 1, 1 1/4 and their combinations Output pressure ranges Media Ambient temperature Dirt trap Pressure switches Pressure regulator Solenoid valve V1 Solenoid valve V MB- S0/S p a : 4 mbar (0.4 kpa) to 0 mbar ( kpa) MB- S50/S5 p a : 4 mbar (0.4 kpa) to 50 mbar (5 kpa) Gases of families 1,, 3 and other neutral gaseous media -15 C to +70 C (Do not operate MB-D below 0 C in liquid gas systems. Only suitable for gaseous liquid gas, liquid hydrocarbons destroy sealing materials.) Sieve, microfilter, changing the filter is possible without removing the valve. Types GW A5, ÜB A / NB A to DIN EN 1854 may be attached. For further information, refer to Datasheets 5.0 and 5.07 Pressure Switches for DUNGS Multiple Actuators Pressure regulator compensated for residual pressure, leakproof seal when switched off by means of valve V1 as per DIN EN 88 Class A. Setpoint spring permanently installed (no spring exchange possible). A vent line above roof is not required. Internal pulse tap provided. Valve as per DIN EN 161 Class A Group, fast closing, fast opening Valve as per DIN EN 161 Class A Group, fast closing Valve V design Partial volume restrictor Main volume restrictor MB-ZR fast opening with without MB-ZRD fast opening with with MB-ZRDLE slow opening with with MB-ZRLE slow opening with without Measuring / Ignition gas connection Burner pressure monitor p Br Voltage / Frequency Electrical connection Rating / Power consumption Switch-on duration Degree of protection Radio interference For G 1/8 as per DIN ISO 8, refer to Pressure taps on page Connection downstream of valve V, pressure switch A mountable on adapter laterally Hz 0-30 V AC -15 % +10 % Other preferred voltages: 40 V AC, V AC, 48 VDC, 4-8 VDC Plug connection as per DIN EN for valves and pressure switches Refer to Dimensions on page % IP 54 as per IEC 59 (EN 6059) Interference degree N Materials of gas conveying parts Housing Diaphragms, seals Solenoid drive aluminium die casting NBR basis, Silopren (silicone rubber) steel, brass, aluminium Installation position Closed position signal contact Solenoid vertically upright or lying horizontally as well as its intermediate positions. Closed position signal contact, type K01/1 (DIN-tested), mountable on V 3 6

177 Equipment variants GasMultiBloc...B01 Two-stage function MB-ZR MB-ZRD MB-ZRDLE MB-ZRLE Microfilter with sieve Gas pressure switch downstream of filter downstream of valve V on adapter laterally Pressure regulator Valve V1, double seat Valve V, single seat Valve V, double seat Valves opening together Valves opening separately Flange Rp 1/ Rp 3/4 Rp 1 Rp 1 1/4 405 B B B01 41 B01 S 0, S 50 S, S 5 = possible () = on request - = not possible MB-ZR...B01 version V1 = Valve 1 V = Valve 3 = Dirt trap 4 = Pressure switch 5 = Regulator 3 4 V1 5 V Mounting of VPS 504 valve proving system possible Mounting of K01/1 closed position signal contact possible Type key of MultiBloc 0 = common = separated = 4-0 mbar up to 360 mbar 5 = 4-50 mbar up to 360 mbar 1 = two A valves for main gas + regulator 7 = two A valves for main gas, one A valve together with V1 as internal bypass around V + regulator 403 = DN 10, V = Single-seat valve 405 = DN 15, V = Single-seat valve 407 = DN 0, V = Double-seat valve 410 = DN 5, V = Single-seat valve 41 = DN 3, V = Double-seat valve 415 = DN 40, V = Double-seat valve 40 = DN 50, V = Double-seat valve without = (MB or MB-ZR) -D = Main volume restrictor -LE = adjustable opening behaviour -DLE = D + LE combination without = single stage ZR = double-stage with partial volume setting first stage 4 6

178 Dimensions [mm] d = Space requirement for cover of pressure switch k = Space requirement for exchanging the solenoid l = Space requirement for K01/1 closed position signal contact Type Rp Opening time a b c Dimensions [mm] d e f g h i k l Weight [kg] MB-ZRD 405/407 B01 MB-ZRDLE 405/407 B01 MB-ZRD 410/41 B01 MB-ZRDLE 410/41 B01 Rp 1/ Rp 3/4 Rp 1 Rp 1 1/4 < 1 s < 0 s < 1 s < 0 s Rating/power consumption [VA] 30 V AC; +0 C: MB-ZR 405/407 S 0 MB-ZR 405/407 S 50 MB-ZR 405/407 S MB-ZR 405/407 S 5 MB-ZR 410/41 S 0 MB-ZR 410/41 S 50 MB-ZR 410/41 S MB-ZR 410/41 S

179 GasMultiBloc Combined regulator and safety shut-off valves Two-stage function MB-ZRD(LE) B01 Volumetric flow pressure loss characteristics in regulated state with microfilter MB-405 S0, S MB-405 S50, S5 MB-407 S0, S MB-410 S0, S MB-407 S50, S5 MB-410 S50, S5 MB-41 S0, S MB-41 S50, S p = 3 mbar Br Recommended operating range p [mbar] V min. MB-ZR(DLE) 405 /407 V min. MB-ZR(DLE) 410 /41 MB-ZR(DLE) 405 Rp 1/ - Rp 1/ MB-ZR(DLE) 407 Rp 3/4 - Rp 3/4 MB-ZR(DLE) 410 Rp 1 - Rp 1 MB-ZR(DLE) 41 Rp 5/4 - Rp 5/4 1 Basis + 15 C, 1013 mbar, trocken Based on + 15 C, 1013 mbar, dry Base + 15 C, 1013 mbar, sec Base + 15 C, 1013 mbar, secco 0,1 0, 0,3 0,4 0,50,6 0, Vn [m 3 /h] Luft / Air / Aria dv = 1,00 0, 0,3 0,4 0,50,6 0, Vn [m 3 /h] Erdgas/Natural gas/gaz Naturel/Gas metano dv = 0,65 f = Dichte Luft Spec. weight air poids spécifique de l'air peso specifico aria Dichte des verwendeten Gases Spec. weight of gas used poids spécifique du gaz utilisé peso specifico del gas utilizzato Gas type Nat. gas City gas LPG Air Density [kg/m 3 ] dv f V verwendetes Gas/gas used/ gaz utilisé/gas utilizzato = V Luft/air/air/aria x f We reserve the right to make any changes in the interest of technical progress. 6 6

180 GasMultiBloc Combined regulator and safety shut-off valves Two-stage function MB-ZRD(LE) B Technical description The DUNGS GasMultiBloc integrates filter, regulator, valves and pressure switches in one compact fitting. - Dirt trap: microfilter - One regulator and two main valves: B01 - One one-stage valve and one two-stage valve - One valve is fast opening, one valve is slow or fast opening - Solenoid valves up to 360 mbar (36 kpa) as per DIN EN 161 Class A Group - Sensitive setting of output pressure by proportional regulator as per DIN EN 88 Class A Group - High flow rates with low pressure drop - DC solenoid drive interference degree N - Main volume restrictor and partial volume restrictor at valve V - Hydraulic opening delay - Flange connections with pipe threads as per ISO 7/1 - Simple mounting, compact, light-weight The modular system permits individual solutions by using external ignition gas tap in connection with separately controlled valves, by adding a valve proving system, mini/maxi pressure switches, pressure limiters, limit switch at valve V. Application The modular system permits individual solutions in gas safety and regulator engineering. Suitable for gases of families 1,, 3 and other neutral gaseous media. Approvals EC type test approval as per EC Gas Appliance Directive: MB-ZR B01 CE-0085 AP 3156 EC type test approval as per EC Pressure Equipment Directive: MB-ZR B01 CE0036 Approvals in other important gas consuming countries.

181 Functional description of gas flow 1. When the valves V1 and V are closed, chamber A is under inlet pressure.. A hole D in the filter housing connects min. pressure switch with chamber A. If the inlet pressure applied to the pressure switch exceeds the incoming reference value, it switches through to the automatic burner control. 3. After release by the automatic burner control, valves V1 and V open. The gas flows through chambers A, B and C of the GasMultiBloc. 4. On request, the second stage of valve V opens. Sectional drawing of MB-ZRDLE V/ Operating method of valve-regulator combination on valve V1 A regulator, compensating for residual pressure is integrated in valve V1 (pressure regulating part). Armature 8 is not connected to valve plate unit 3. When it opens, armature 8 pretensions compression spring (V1) 5 and releases the valve plate unit. When the valve closes, the armature acts directly on the valve plate unit. The output pressure upstream of valve V is defined by pretensioning regulating spring 7 (tension spring) via setting screw 18. The output pressure acts via opening E on the working diaphragm of the regulator part. In regulated state, setting spring inlet pressure and pressure of working diaphragm are in force equilibrium. The compensating diaphragm 3 ensures the fast closing function of valve V1 and a high regulating quality Pressure regulator Microfilter 3 Valve V1 4 Connection flange 5 Closing spring V1 6 Housing 7 Regulating spring 8 Armature V1 9 Solenoid V1 D p 1 p AV1 V C V1 10 Gas pressure switch 11 Electrical connection 1 Valve V 13 Closing spring V 14 Armature V (1st stage) 15 Solenoid V (1st stage) 16 Armature V (nd stage) 17 Solenoid V (nd stage) 18 Electrical connection B E V V/ Setting: 19 - Gas pressure p a 0 - Partial volume, 1st stage 1 - Main volume - Fast stroke 3 Working diaphragm 4 Compensation diaphragm Operating method of valve V Armature 14 of valve V is connected to valve plate unit 11. When it opens, armature 14 pretensions closing spring 13. The valve opening of stage 1 can be set by limiting the armature stroke by means of main volume restrictor 19. Min. opening (residual stroke) of valve (0.5 to 1.0 mm) If the second stage of valve opens, closing spring 13 is continuously pretensioned. The maximum valve opening of stage can be set by limiting the armature stroke of armature 16 by means of the main volume restrictor. Main volume restrictor 0 is set by rotating the adjusting plate or the hydraulic brake. The fast and/or slow opening characteristic acts on both stages. It is influenced by setting the fast stroke at the hydraulic brake under the cover. Closing function When the supply voltage to the solenoid coils of valves V1 and V is interrupted, they are closed within < 1 s by the compression springs. Pressure taps 1 5 0, 1,, 3, 4, 5 G 1/8 screw plug Electrical connection S 0/S p e p a p Br 3 4 p e p a p Br P L 3 MP N P1 L P1 L1 P L Mp N 5 S /S 5 P1 L1 Mp N P L MP N N Mp L P 1 P L 3 P1 L1 Valves V1, V 1st stage Valve V nd stage N Mp L P 6

182 Specifications Nominal diameters Flange with pipe threads as per ISO 7/1 (DIN 999) Max. operating pressure MB-ZR 415 B01 Rp 1, 1 1/4, 1 1/, and their combinations 360 mbar (36 kpa) MB-ZR 40 B01 Rp 1, 1 1/4, 1 1/, and their combinations Output pressure ranges Media Ambient temperature Dirt trap Pressure switches Pressure regulator Solenoid valve V1 Solenoid valve V MB-ZR S0/S p a : 4 mbar (0.4 kpa) to 0 mbar ( kpa) MB-ZR S50/S5 p a : 0 mbar ( kpa) to 50 mbar (5 kpa) Gases of families 1,, 3 and other neutral gaseous media -15 C to +70 C (Do not operate MB-ZR below 0 C in liquid gas systems. Only suitable for gaseous liquid gas, liquid hydrocarbons destroy sealing materials.) Sieve, microfilter, changing the filter is possible without removing the valve. Types GW A5, ÜB A / NB A to DIN EN 1854 may be attached. For further information, refer to Datasheets 5.0 and 5.07 Pressure Switches for DUNGS Multiple Actuators Pressure regulator compensated for residual pressure, leakproof seal when switched off by means of valve V1 as per DIN EN 88 Class A. Setpoint spring permanently installed (no spring exchange possible). A vent line above roof is not required. Internal pulse tap provided. Valve as per DIN EN 161 Class A Group, fast closing, fast opening Valve as per DIN EN 161 Class A Group, fast closing Valve V design Partial volume restrictor Main volume restrictor MB-ZR fast opening with without MB-ZRD fast opening with with MB-ZRDLE slowly opening with with MB-ZRLE slowly opening with without Measuring / Ignition gas connection Burner pressure monitor p Br Voltage / Frequency Electrical connection Rating / Power consumption Switch-on duration Degree of protection Radio interference For G 1/8 as per DIN ISO 8, refer to Pressure taps on page Connection downstream of valve V, pressure switch mountable on adapter laterally Hz, 0-30 V AC, -15 % +10 % Other preferred voltages: 40 VAC, VAC, 48 VDC, 4-8 VDC Plug connection as per DIN EN for valves and pressure switches Refer to Dimensions on page % IP 54 as per IEC 59 (EN 6059) Interference degree N Materials of gas conveying parts Housing Diaphragms, seals Solenoid drive aluminium die casting NBR basis, Silopren (silicone rubber) steel, brass, aluminium Installation position Closed position signal contact Solenoid vertically upright or lying horizontally as well as its intermediate positions. Closed position signal contact, type K01/1 (DIN-tested), mountable to V 3 6

183 Equipment variants GasMultiBloc...B01 Two-stage function MB-ZR MB-ZRD MB-ZRDLE MB-ZRLE Microfilter (standard) with sieve Gas pressure switch downstream of filter downstream of valve V on adapter laterally Pressure regulator Valve V1, double seat Valve V, double seat Valves opening together Valves opening separately Flange Rp 1 Rp 1 1/4 Rp 1 1/ Rp 415 B01 40 B01 Filter element can be removed. A suitable GF.../1 gas filter must then be fitted upstream. S 0, S 50 S, S 5 = possible () = on request - = not possible MB-ZR...B01 design V1 = Valve 1 V = Valve 3 = Filter 4 = Pressure switch 5 = Regulator 4 Mounting of VPS 504 valve proving system possible Mounting of K01/1 closed position signal contact possible 3 V1 5 V Type key of MultiBloc 0 = common = separated = 4-0 mbar up to 360 mbar 5 = 4-50 mbar up to 360 mbar 1 = two A valves for main gas + regulator 7 = two A valves for main gas, one A valve together with V1 as internal bypass around V + regulator 403 = DN 10, V = Single-seat valve 405 = DN 15, V = Single-seat valve 407 = DN 0, V = Double-seat valve 410 = DN 5, V = Single-seat valve 41 = DN 3, V = Double-seat valve 415 = DN 40, V = Double-seat valve 40 = DN 50, V = Double-seat valve without = (MB or MB-ZR) -D = Main volume restrictor -LE = adjustable opening behaviour -DLE = D + LE combination without = single stage ZR = double-stage with partial volume setting first stage 4 6

184 Dimensions [mm] MB-DLE 415 = 350 MB-DLE 40 = 407 A 40 MB-DLE 415 =70 MB-DLE 40 = 330 MB-DLE 415 = 350 MB-DLE 40 = Rp 1, 1 1/4 = 56 Rp 1 1/, = 83 Type Rp Opening time Nominal rating [VA] 30 V AC; +0 C S0 S50 S S5 Weight [kg] MB-ZRD 415 B01 MB-ZRDLE 415 B01 MB-ZRD 40 B01 MB-ZRDLE 40 B01 Rp 1 - Rp 1 - Rp 1 - Rp 1 - < 1 s < 0 s < 1 s < 0 s ,

185 GasMultiBloc Combined regulator and safety shut-off valves Two-stage function MB-ZRD(LE) B01 Volumetric flow pressure loss characteristics in regulated state with microfilter p = 3 mbar Br MB- 415 S0/S p = 0 mbar Br MB- 415 S50/S5 p = 3 mbar Br MB- 40 S0/S p = 0 mbar Br MB- 40 S50/S Recommended working range MB-DLE/ZR 415 B01 S Rp 1 1/ MB-DLE/ZR 40 B01 S 5 Rp 1 Basis + 15 C, 1013 mbar, trocken Based on + 15 C, 1013 mbar, dry Base + 15 C, 1013 mbar, sec Base + 15 C, 1013 mbar, secco 0,1 0, 0,3 0,4 0,50,6 0, Vn [m 3 /h] Luft / Air / Aria dv = 1,00 0, 0,3 0,4 0,50,6 0, Vn [m 3 /h] Erdgas/Natural gas/gaz Naturel/Gas metano dv = 0,65 f = Dichte Luft Spec. weight air poids spécifique de l'air peso specifico aria Dichte des verwendeten Gases Spec. weight of gas used poids spécifique du gaz utilisé peso specifico del gas utilizzato Gas type Nat. gas City gas LPG Air Density [kg/m 3 ] dv f V verwendetes Gas/gas used/ gaz utilisé/gas utilizzato = V Luft/air/air/aria x f We reserve the right to make any changes in the interest of technical progress. 6 6

186 Safety solenoid valve, ignition gas valve MV Technical description The DUNGS safety solenoid valve MV 50 is a single-stage automatic shut-off valve as per EN 161 for gas burners and gas appliances. - Max. operating pressure up to 500 mbar (50 kpa) - Class A, Group as per EN normally closed - Fast opening - Fast closing - DC solenoid, rectifier wiring and radio interference suppression integrated in solenoid housing - Electrical connection by plug connection as per DIN EN or fixed connected connection cable (1.300 mm) - Optionally with tube screw union or Rp 1/4 thread connection - Reliable function, rugged and maintenance-free Application The MV 50 solenoid valves are suitable for shutting off and releasing gases of families 1,, 3 and other neutral gaseous media. The MV 50 is used as ignition or start gas valve. Approvals EC type test approval as per EC Gas Appliance Directive: MV 50 CE-0085AQ 0674 EC type test approval as per EC Pressure Equipment Directive: MV 50 CE 0036 Approvals in other important gas consuming countries.

187 MV 50 Single-stage solenoid valve, normally closed, fast opening, fast closing. Specifications Nominal diameter Connection Max. operating pressure Closing time Opening time Materials of gas-conneying parts Voltage / frequency Switch-on duration Degree of protection Electrical connection Switching rate Dirt trap Ambient temperature Installation position DN 8 Rp 1/4 thread connection as per ISO 7-1 or GE 8 - PL/R 1/4 tube screw union for 8 dia. The flow direction is marked by an arrow on the housing 0.5 bar (50 kpa) < 1 s < 1 s Housing: brass, steel, NBR, POM Seals: NBR basis Hz, 30 V - 40 V AC - 15% +10% Other voltages on request 100 % ED IP 54 as per IEC 59 (EN 60 59) Solenoid with fixed connection cable (1300 x 3 x 0.75 mm) or plug connection as per DIN EN Max. 1000/h Sieve installed, mesh width 1 mm -15 C to +60 C Solenoid from vertically upright to horizontally lying 4

188 Dimensions [mm] Type DN / Rp P max. [VA] I max. ~ (AC) 30 V Opening time Weight [kg] MV 50 DN 8 / Rp 1/ < 1 s 0.0 MV 50 type overview Type P max. [bar] Voltage Plug connection for line sockets 1) as per DIN Cable length: mm Tube screw union (for 8 dia.) Rp 1/4 thread connection Order No. MV ~ (AC) 30 V - 40 V MV ~ (AC) 30 V - 40 V MV ~ (AC) 30 V - 40 V MV ~ (AC) 30 V - 40 V standard -- cannot be supplied 1) Please order line socket (black), Order No , separately 3 4

189 Safety solenoid valve, ignition gas valve MV 50 Flow diagram p [mbar] MV ,0 0,9 0,8 0,7 0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 Basis +15 C, 1013 mbar, trocken Based on +15 C, 1013 mbar, dry Base +15 C, 1013 mbar,sec Base +15 C, 1013 mbar, secco 0, 0,1 0, 0,4 0,6 0, Vn [m 3/h] Luft / Air / Aria dv = 1,00 0,1 0, 0,4 0,6 0, Vn [m 3 /h] Erdgas / Natural gas / Gaz Naturel / Gas metano dv = 0,65 4 4

190 Single-stage safety solenoid valves MV/4 MVD, MVD/5, MVDLE/ Technical description The DUNGS safety solenoid valve MV/4, MVD, MVD/5, MVDLE/5 is a single-stage automatic shut-off valve as per EN 161 for gas burners and gas appliance. - Max. operating pressure up to 00, 360 or 500 mbar (0, 36 or 50 kpa) - normally closed - MV, MVD: fast opening - MVDLE: Slow opening with adjustable fast stroke for start gas volume - Main volume adjustable (MVD/MVDLE) - DC solenoid, rectifier wiring with radio interference suppression in terminal box with PG screw union - Mountable closed position signal contact to monitor closed position of valve (.../5) - Pipe thread as per ISO 7/1 - Flange connection as per DIN 633, ISO Reliable function, rugged and maintenance-free - On request, design without non-ferrous metals Application The solenoid valve is used for securing, limiting, shutting off and releasing gas supply to gas burners and gas appliances. MV/4 Range of application: for large breaking capacities, e.g. pulsed firing. The DUNGS safety solenoid valve MV... is suitable for gases of families 1,, 3 and other neutral gaseous media. Approval EC type test approval as per EC Gas Appliance Directive: MV CE-0085 AO319 EC type test approval as per EC Pressure Equipment Directive: MV CE0036 Approvals in other important gas consuming countries. Special designs for the North American market with U L, FM and CSA registrations.

191 MV/4, MV/5 MVD/5 MVDLE/5 Single-stage solenoid valve, normally when closed, fast opening, fast closing. Single-stage solenoid valve, normally when closed, fast opening, fast closing, manual limitation of flowing gas volume by adjusting main volume. One-stage solenoid valve, normally when closed, slow opening, fast closing. Opening time adjustment with fast stroke range. Main volume adjustment. Specifications Nominal diameters Pipe thread as per ISO 7/1, Rp Flange Max. operating pressure Solenoid valve Closing time Opening time Fast stroke Main volume adjustment /8 1/ 3/ / 1/ Connection flange as per DIN EN up to 00 mbar (0 kpa), 360 mbar (36 kpa) or up to 500 mbar (50 kpa) - refer to type overview Valve as per EN 161, Class A, Group, single-stage mode < 1 s < 1 s for MVDLE approx. 0 s at room temperature 0 C and without fast stroke Adjustable Manually adjustable on MVD and MVDLE Materials of gas-conveying parts Housing: Seals: aluminium, steel, brass NBR basis Voltage/frequency Rating / power consumption Switch-on duration Degree of protection Electrical connection Switching rate Measuring/ignition gas connection Dirt trap Ambient temperature Installation position Closed position signal contact Valve proving system Accessories 30 V AC (+10 % -15 %); Hz - other voltages on request Solenoids 60E, 61E in 4-8 VDC external activation of solenoid coils required, see operating and mounting instructions Refer to type overview 100 % IP 54, IP 65 on request At screw terminals via PG* 11 cable gland (* = heavy-gauge conduit thread) Plug connection as per DIN can be retrofitted MV/4, MVD /5: max. 1000/h MVDLE /5: max. 100/h MVD 15/5, MVD 150/5, MVD 5100/5, MVD 515/5, MVD 5150/5: max. 0/h MV 515/5 S, MV 5150/5 S, MVD 00: max. 0/h G 1/4 ISO 118, on both sides in inlet section, additionally G 3/4 on input side, form size DN 40 (flange) upwards Sieve installed, mesh width 1 mm -15 C to +60 C Solenoid from vertically upright to horizontally lying MV/5, MVD/5, MVDLE/5: Type K01/1, DIN-tested, mountable on DN 10 - DN 150 Type VDK 00 A S0, mountable via G 1/4 test connection, Type VPS 504, mountable with adapter up to DN 80 K01 closed position signal contact, see Datasheet Equipment plug for line socket, DIN

192 Type p max. DN / Rp Solenoid No. Order No. P max. [VA] I max. Opening ~ (AC) time 30 V Dimensions [mm] ø a b c d e f Weight [kg] MV 05/4 MV 07/4 MV 10/4 MV 15/4 MV 0/ Rp 1/ Rp 3/4 Rp 1 Rp 1 1/ Rp < 1 s < 1 s < 1 s < 1 s < 1 s MVD 03/5 MVD 05/5 MVD 07/5 MVD 07/5 MVD 10/5 MVD 15/5 MVD 15/5 MVD 0/5 MVD 5/ Rp 3/8 Rp 1/ Rp 3/4 Rp 3/4 Rp 1 Rp 1 1/ Rp 1 1/ Rp Rp 1/ < 1 s < 1 s < 1 s < 1 s < 1 s < 1 s < 1 s < 1 s < 1 s MVDLE 03/5 MVDLE 05/5 MVDLE 07/5 MVDLE 10/5 MVDLE 15/5 MVDLE 15/5 MVDLE 0/5 MVDLE 5/ Rp 3/8 Rp 1/ Rp 3/4 Rp 1 Rp 1 1/ Rp 1 1/ Rp Rp 1/ approx. 0 s approx. 0 s approx. 0 s approx. 0 s approx. 0 s approx. 0 s approx. 0 s approx. 0 s MVD 503/5 MVD 505/5 MVD 507/5 MVD 510/5 MVD 515/5 MVD 50/5 MVD 55/ Rp 3/8 Rp 1/ Rp 3/4 Rp 1 Rp 1 1/ Rp Rp 1/ < 1 s < 1 s < 1 s < 1 s < 1 s < 1 s < 1 s MVDLE 503/5 MVDLE 505/5 MVDLE 507/5 MVDLE 510/5 MVDLE 515/5 MVDLE 50/ Rp 3/8 Rp 1/ Rp 3/4 Rp 1 Rp 1 1/ Rp approx. 0 s approx. 0 s approx. 0 s approx. 0 s approx. 0 s approx. 0 s MVD 040/5 MVD 040/5 MVD 050/5 MVD 065/5 MVD 080/5 MVD 100/ DN 40 DN 40 DN 50 DN 65 DN 80 DN < 1 s < 1 s < 1 s < 1 s < 1 s < 1 s MVDLE 040/5 MVDLE 040/5 MVDLE 050/5 MVDLE 065/5 MVDLE 080/5 MVDLE 100/ DN 40 DN 40 DN 50 DN 65 DN 80 DN approx. 0 s approx. 0 s approx. 0 s approx. 0 s approx. 0 s approx. 0 s MVD 5040/5 MVD 5050/5 MVD 5065/5 MVD 5080/5 MVD 5100/ DN 40 DN 50 DN 65 DN 80 DN E 1) * < 1 s < 1 s < 1 s < 1 s < 1 s MVDLE 5040/5 MVDLE 5050/ DN 40 DN ca. 0 s ca. 0 s f = Space requirement for solenoid changing d = largest width * = for max. 3 s 1) Solenoids 60E, 61E in 4-8 VDC external activation of solenoid coils required, see operating and mounting instructions

193 Dimensions [mm] MV 05-0/4 * MVD 03-55/5, MVDLE 00/5-5100/5 d = largest width Ignition gas valve, Type MV 50, refer to Datasheet 6.01 * Mounting of a closed position signal contact not possible Dimensions [mm] MV 5100/5 - MVD 00 MV 515 S MV 5150 S Type p max. DN / Rp Order No. Solenoid No. P max. [VA]* I max. ~(AC) 30 V [A] ** Opening time Dimensions [mm] a b c d e f g h Weight [kg] MV 515/5 S MV 5150/5 S DN 15 DN S 61S < 1 s < 1 s MVD 100/5 MVD 5100/5 MVD 15/5 MVD 515/5 MVD 150/5 MVD 5150/ DN 100 DN 100 DN 15 DN 15 DN 150 DN E 1) 60E 1) 60E 1) 61E 1) 61E 1) < 1 s < 1 s < 1 s < 1 s < 1 s < 1 s MVD DN E < 1 s * Electrical rating in open state ** Switch-on current for approx. 3 s 1) Solenoids 60E, 61E in 4-8 VDC external activation of solenoid coils required, see operating and mounting instructions 4 6

194 Type MVD /5 Type MVDLE/ p 1 p p 1 p 1 Housing Sieve 3 Valve plate 4 Closing spring 5 Armature 6 Solenoid coil 7 Electrical connection Setting 8 - Main volume 9 - Fast stroke 10 - Hydraulic brake Functional description The DUNGS safety solenoid valve is an automatic shut-off valve operated with auxiliary power. The electromagnetic drive opens against the force of the closing spring 4. The stroke of armature 5 can be limited by the setting screw 8. The hydraulic brake 10 permits slow opening. Fast stroke 9 can be adjusted. If the auxiliary power is interrupted (operating voltage), closing spring 4 closes the valve within 1 second. The closed position of the valve can be monitored by a mountable closed position signal contact. V verwendetes Gas/gas used/ gaz utilisé/gas utilizzato = V Luft/air/air/aria x f Gasart Type of gas Type de gaz Tipo di gas Dichte Spec. Wgt. poids spécifique Peso specifico [kg/m 3 ] dv f 5 6 f = Dichte Luft Spec. weight air poids spécifique de l air peso specifico aria Dichte des verwendeten Gases Spec. weight of gas used poids spécifique du gaz utilisé peso specifico del gas utilizzato Erdgas/Nat.Gas/ Gaz naturel/gas metano Stadtgas/City gas/ Gaz de ville/gas città Flüssiggas/LPG/ Gaz liquide/gas liquido Luft/Air/ Air/Aria

195 Single-stage safety solenoid valves MV/4 MVD, MVD/5, MVDLE/5 Flow diagram 6 6

196 Single-stage safety solenoid valves MV/4 MVD, MVD/5, MVDLE/ Technical description The DUNGS safety solenoid valve MV/4, MVD, MVD/5, MVDLE/5 is a single-stage automatic shut-off valve as per EN 161 for gas burners and gas appliance. - Max. operating pressure up to 00, 360 or 500 mbar (0, 36 or 50 kpa) - normally closed - MV, MVD: fast opening - MVDLE: Slow opening with adjustable fast stroke for start gas volume - Main volume adjustable (MVD/MVDLE) - DC solenoid, rectifier wiring with radio interference suppression in terminal box with PG screw union - Mountable closed position signal contact to monitor closed position of valve (.../5) - Pipe thread as per ISO 7/1 - Flange connection as per DIN 633, ISO Reliable function, rugged and maintenance-free - On request, design without non-ferrous metals Application The solenoid valve is used for securing, limiting, shutting off and releasing gas supply to gas burners and gas appliances. MV/4 Range of application: for large breaking capacities, e.g. pulsed firing. The DUNGS safety solenoid valve MV... is suitable for gases of families 1,, 3 and other neutral gaseous media. Approval EC type test approval as per EC Gas Appliance Directive: MV CE-0085 AO319 EC type test approval as per EC Pressure Equipment Directive: MV CE0036 Approvals in other important gas consuming countries. Special designs for the North American market with U L, FM and CSA registrations.

197 MV/4, MV/5 MVD/5 MVDLE/5 Single-stage solenoid valve, normally when closed, fast opening, fast closing. Single-stage solenoid valve, normally when closed, fast opening, fast closing, manual limitation of flowing gas volume by adjusting main volume. One-stage solenoid valve, normally when closed, slow opening, fast closing. Opening time adjustment with fast stroke range. Main volume adjustment. Specifications Nominal diameters Pipe thread as per ISO 7/1, Rp Flange Max. operating pressure Solenoid valve Closing time Opening time Fast stroke Main volume adjustment /8 1/ 3/ / 1/ Connection flange as per DIN EN up to 00 mbar (0 kpa), 360 mbar (36 kpa) or up to 500 mbar (50 kpa) - refer to type overview Valve as per EN 161, Class A, Group, single-stage mode < 1 s < 1 s for MVDLE approx. 0 s at room temperature 0 C and without fast stroke Adjustable Manually adjustable on MVD and MVDLE Materials of gas-conveying parts Housing: Seals: aluminium, steel, brass NBR basis Voltage/frequency Rating / power consumption Switch-on duration Degree of protection Electrical connection Switching rate Measuring/ignition gas connection Dirt trap Ambient temperature Installation position Closed position signal contact Valve proving system Accessories 30 V AC (+10 % -15 %); Hz - other voltages on request Solenoids 60E, 61E in 4-8 VDC external activation of solenoid coils required, see operating and mounting instructions Refer to type overview 100 % IP 54, IP 65 on request At screw terminals via PG* 11 cable gland (* = heavy-gauge conduit thread) Plug connection as per DIN can be retrofitted MV/4, MVD /5: max. 1000/h MVDLE /5: max. 100/h MVD 15/5, MVD 150/5, MVD 5100/5, MVD 515/5, MVD 5150/5: max. 0/h MV 515/5 S, MV 5150/5 S, MVD 00: max. 0/h G 1/4 ISO 118, on both sides in inlet section, additionally G 3/4 on input side, form size DN 40 (flange) upwards Sieve installed, mesh width 1 mm -15 C to +60 C Solenoid from vertically upright to horizontally lying MV/5, MVD/5, MVDLE/5: Type K01/1, DIN-tested, mountable on DN 10 - DN 150 Type VDK 00 A S0, mountable via G 1/4 test connection, Type VPS 504, mountable with adapter up to DN 80 K01 closed position signal contact, see Datasheet Equipment plug for line socket, DIN

198 Type p max. DN / Rp Solenoid No. Order No. P max. [VA] I max. Opening ~ (AC) time 30 V Dimensions [mm] ø a b c d e f Weight [kg] MV 05/4 MV 07/4 MV 10/4 MV 15/4 MV 0/ Rp 1/ Rp 3/4 Rp 1 Rp 1 1/ Rp < 1 s < 1 s < 1 s < 1 s < 1 s MVD 03/5 MVD 05/5 MVD 07/5 MVD 07/5 MVD 10/5 MVD 15/5 MVD 15/5 MVD 0/5 MVD 5/ Rp 3/8 Rp 1/ Rp 3/4 Rp 3/4 Rp 1 Rp 1 1/ Rp 1 1/ Rp Rp 1/ < 1 s < 1 s < 1 s < 1 s < 1 s < 1 s < 1 s < 1 s < 1 s MVDLE 03/5 MVDLE 05/5 MVDLE 07/5 MVDLE 10/5 MVDLE 15/5 MVDLE 15/5 MVDLE 0/5 MVDLE 5/ Rp 3/8 Rp 1/ Rp 3/4 Rp 1 Rp 1 1/ Rp 1 1/ Rp Rp 1/ approx. 0 s approx. 0 s approx. 0 s approx. 0 s approx. 0 s approx. 0 s approx. 0 s approx. 0 s MVD 503/5 MVD 505/5 MVD 507/5 MVD 510/5 MVD 515/5 MVD 50/5 MVD 55/ Rp 3/8 Rp 1/ Rp 3/4 Rp 1 Rp 1 1/ Rp Rp 1/ < 1 s < 1 s < 1 s < 1 s < 1 s < 1 s < 1 s MVDLE 503/5 MVDLE 505/5 MVDLE 507/5 MVDLE 510/5 MVDLE 515/5 MVDLE 50/ Rp 3/8 Rp 1/ Rp 3/4 Rp 1 Rp 1 1/ Rp approx. 0 s approx. 0 s approx. 0 s approx. 0 s approx. 0 s approx. 0 s MVD 040/5 MVD 040/5 MVD 050/5 MVD 065/5 MVD 080/5 MVD 100/ DN 40 DN 40 DN 50 DN 65 DN 80 DN < 1 s < 1 s < 1 s < 1 s < 1 s < 1 s MVDLE 040/5 MVDLE 040/5 MVDLE 050/5 MVDLE 065/5 MVDLE 080/5 MVDLE 100/ DN 40 DN 40 DN 50 DN 65 DN 80 DN approx. 0 s approx. 0 s approx. 0 s approx. 0 s approx. 0 s approx. 0 s MVD 5040/5 MVD 5050/5 MVD 5065/5 MVD 5080/5 MVD 5100/ DN 40 DN 50 DN 65 DN 80 DN E 1) * < 1 s < 1 s < 1 s < 1 s < 1 s MVDLE 5040/5 MVDLE 5050/ DN 40 DN ca. 0 s ca. 0 s f = Space requirement for solenoid changing d = largest width * = for max. 3 s 1) Solenoids 60E, 61E in 4-8 VDC external activation of solenoid coils required, see operating and mounting instructions

199 Dimensions [mm] MV 05-0/4 * MVD 03-55/5, MVDLE 00/5-5100/5 d = largest width Ignition gas valve, Type MV 50, refer to Datasheet 6.01 * Mounting of a closed position signal contact not possible Dimensions [mm] MV 5100/5 - MVD 00 MV 515 S MV 5150 S Type p max. DN / Rp Order No. Solenoid No. P max. [VA]* I max. ~(AC) 30 V [A] ** Opening time Dimensions [mm] a b c d e f g h Weight [kg] MV 515/5 S MV 5150/5 S DN 15 DN S 61S < 1 s < 1 s MVD 100/5 MVD 5100/5 MVD 15/5 MVD 515/5 MVD 150/5 MVD 5150/ DN 100 DN 100 DN 15 DN 15 DN 150 DN E 1) 60E 1) 60E 1) 61E 1) 61E 1) < 1 s < 1 s < 1 s < 1 s < 1 s < 1 s MVD DN E < 1 s * Electrical rating in open state ** Switch-on current for approx. 3 s 1) Solenoids 60E, 61E in 4-8 VDC external activation of solenoid coils required, see operating and mounting instructions 4 6

200 Type MVD /5 Type MVDLE/ p 1 p p 1 p 1 Housing Sieve 3 Valve plate 4 Closing spring 5 Armature 6 Solenoid coil 7 Electrical connection Setting 8 - Main volume 9 - Fast stroke 10 - Hydraulic brake Functional description The DUNGS safety solenoid valve is an automatic shut-off valve operated with auxiliary power. The electromagnetic drive opens against the force of the closing spring 4. The stroke of armature 5 can be limited by the setting screw 8. The hydraulic brake 10 permits slow opening. Fast stroke 9 can be adjusted. If the auxiliary power is interrupted (operating voltage), closing spring 4 closes the valve within 1 second. The closed position of the valve can be monitored by a mountable closed position signal contact. V verwendetes Gas/gas used/ gaz utilisé/gas utilizzato = V Luft/air/air/aria x f Gasart Type of gas Type de gaz Tipo di gas Dichte Spec. Wgt. poids spécifique Peso specifico [kg/m 3 ] dv f 5 6 f = Dichte Luft Spec. weight air poids spécifique de l air peso specifico aria Dichte des verwendeten Gases Spec. weight of gas used poids spécifique du gaz utilisé peso specifico del gas utilizzato Erdgas/Nat.Gas/ Gaz naturel/gas metano Stadtgas/City gas/ Gaz de ville/gas città Flüssiggas/LPG/ Gaz liquide/gas liquido Luft/Air/ Air/Aria

201 Single-stage safety solenoid valves MV/4 MVD, MVD/5, MVDLE/5 Flow diagram 6 6

202 Pressure limiter for multiple actuators ÜB A NB A Technical description The pressure limiters ÜB A and NB A are compact pressure switches as per EN 1854 for DUNGS multiple actuators. The pressure switches are suitable for switching a circuit on, off or over on changes in actual pressure value relative to the set reference value. The reference valve (switching point) can be set easily and quickly by means of a setting wheel provided with a scale without the use of a pressure gauge. Application Pressure switches for DUNGS multiple actuators GasMultiBloc and DMV double solenoid valve. Various mounting options directly on housing or by means of an adapter. Standard mounting on valve housing on the inlet side via threaded flange. Suitable for gases of families 1,,3 and other neutral gaseous media. Approvals EC type test approval as per EC Gas Appliance Directive: ÜB A CE-0085 AO 30 NB A CE-0085 AO 30 EC type test approval as per EC Pressure Equipment Directive: ÜB A NB A CE0036 CE0036 Approvals in other important gasconsuming countries. Special designs for the North American market with U L, FM and CSA registrations.

203 Functional Description Single-acting pressure limiters in the superpressure range. The pressure limiters work without external energy supply. Pressure limiters ÜB A / NB A The switching mechanism reacts to superpressure. The system is locked if the set reference value is exceeded or undershot. After the fault has been remedied, the system can be put into operation only manually by actuating the unlocking device on the pressure limiter. The switching state Locked is indicated by a neon glow lamp. ÜB A: Switches on and locks if the set pressure value is exceeded. NB A: Switches on and locks if the pressure is lower than the set pressure value. ÜB A switching function As pressure rises NO closes, 1 NC opens Glow lamp ON, locked. COM 3 1 NO NC NB A switching function As pressure falls NO opens, 1 NC closes Glow lamp ON, locked. COM 3 1 NO NC p N p N Specifications Operating state NO Max. operating pressure Pressure connection Temperature range NB...A, ÜB...A 500 mbar (50 kpa) NB 500 A, ÜB 500 A 600 mbar (60 kpa) O ring flange connection on underside of pressure switch Ambient temperature -15 C to +70 C Medium temperature -15 C to +70 C Storage temperature -30 C to +80 C Materials Housing Switch Diaphragms Switching contact aluminium die casting polycarbonate NBR Ag Switching voltage AC eff. min. 10 V max. 50 V DC min. 1 V max. 48 V Nominal current AC eff. 10 A Switching current AC eff. max. 6 A at cos ϕ 1 AC eff. max. 3 A at cos ϕ 0.6 AC eff. min. 0 ma DC min. 0 ma max. 1 A Electrical connection Standard: Special design: plug connection for line sockets as per DIN EN , 3-pin with protective contact at screw terminals via cable gland, PG11 Degree of protection Adjustment Setting tolerance IP 54 as per IEC 59 (EN 6059) In vertical installation position NB A: when the pressure drops ÜB A: when the pressure rises If the installation position is different, take the switch point change into account. ±15% switching point deviation referred to reference value 6

204 Dimensions [mm] NB A, ÜB...A , ,7 (LK 76) Reset button Typ NB A Typ ÜB A Slot for O ring 10,5 x,5 Throughhole for M4 Plug connection for line socket as per DIN EN Adapter Order No. For Equipment / type Nominal diameters Mounting kit 3 80 MB-..., DMV-... Rp 3/8 - DN 15 Adapter p Br MB-D MB-Z DMV /11 Rp 3/8 - Rp Rp 3/8 - Rp Rp 3/8 - Rp Adapter on threaded flange G 1/ MB DMV- Rp 3/8 - Rp 1 1/4 Rp 3/8 - Rp Adapter kit for GW... A with G 1/4 connection 98 MB ,40 DMV Rp 1 - Rp Rp 3/8 - Rp Designation Made in Germany ÜB 150 A [Ag-G3-V1] Pressure connection V1 Pressure connection Position 1 V9 Pressure connection9 Position 9 Electrical connection G3 Equipment plug, 3 pin + E PG PG11 cable gland 6 Contact material Ag Setting ranges (mbar) NB X X X ÜB X X X Order example Pressure switch design ÜB pressure limiter Setting range mbar Contact material Ag Electrical connection Cable gland Pressure connection Position 1 Pressure switch design ÜB... A Pressure limiter switches and locks if set reference value is exceeded. NB... A Pressure limiter switches and locks if set reference value is undershot. ÜB 150 A [Ag-G3-V1] 3 6

205 NB...A / ÜB A mounting options FRI gas pressure regulator Pressure tap NB...A / ÜB A mounting possible p = 500 mbar max. FRI yes 1 3 yes yes 1,,3 seal plug G 1/8 as per DIN ISO 8 The seal plugs 1 can also be replaced by an instrument gland NB...A / ÜB A mounting options MB GasMultiBloc Pressure tap NB...A / ÜB A mounting possible 4 1 p e 3 p a 4 1 yes, with # yes p e 3 p a 3 4 yes yes, with # ,3 seal plug G 1/8 Instrument gland, optional 4 Instrument gland NB...A / ÜB A mounting options MB-D; MB-Z Gas MultiBlocs p e p a p Br Pressure tap 1 NB...A / ÜB A mounting possible alternatively to p e 4 p a 5 p Br no p e p a p Br 3 yes yes yes, with # yes, with # yes p e 4 p a 5 p Br 1,3,4 seal plug G 1/8,6 Instrument gland, optional G 1/8 5 M4 inner hex NB...A / ÜB A mounting options Safety solenoid valve SV Pressure tap NB...A / ÜB A mounting possible SV 505/507 SV 510/51 SV 50 Pressure tap 3 Pressure tap 4 Pressure tap 1 1 pe pa pa Pressure tap no pe pe 3 4 no pa with horizontal pe 1,() pa ) pe 1) pa Pressure taps for 1, and 4 are installed depending on the SV model. 1) Not with appliance connector model ) For pressure switch assembly, pay attention to the flange attachment 4 6

206 NB...A / ÜB A mounting options DMV 503/11 double solenoid valve Pressure tap NB...A / ÜB A mounting possible yes p = 500 mbar max. 4 V1 V 4 yes yes, with # yes, (horizontal) with # (vertical) 1,,4 G 1/8 seal plug as per DIN ISO 8 3 G 1/8 seal plug M4 The seal plugs 1,,4 can also be replaced by an instrument gland NB...A / ÜB A mounting options DMV /11 double solenoid valve, MB , MBC-300/700/100 Pressure tap NB...A / ÜB A mounting possible yes yes yes, with # p = 500 mbar max. 4 V1 V yes, (horizontal) with # (vertical) ,,3,4 G 1/8 seal plug as per DIN ISO 8 The seal plugs 1,,3 can also be replaced by a G 1/8 instrument gland as per DIN ISO 8 NB...A / ÜB A mounting options DMV 55, /11 double solenoid valve DMV-1500-D, DMV DMV MBC MBC (pressure tap 4 no) Pressure tap NB...A / ÜB A mounting possible 1 yes yes p = 500 mbar max yes V1 V 4 yes no 6 no 1,,3,4 G 1/8 seal plug as per DIN ISO 8 5,6 G 1/4 DIN ISO 8 The seal plugs 1,,3,4 can also be replaced by a G 1/8 instrument gland as per DIN ISO 8 5 6

207 Pressure limiter for multiple actuators ÜB A NB A Technical data 1 mbar = 100 Pa = 0.1 kpa 10 mm WS 1 Pa = 0.01 mbar 0.1 mm WS Type Version [AG-G3-V1] Neon glow lamp ~(AC) 30 V Order No. Setting range [mbar] Switching difference p [mbar] ÜB A pressure limiter ÜB 50 A UB 150 A ÜB 500 A NB A pressure limiter NB 50 A NB 150 A NB 500 A Accesories for pressure switch NB A, ÜB A Neon glow lamp with protective resistor (50 x) ~(AC) 0 V (Spare part NB, ÜB) Neon glow lamp with protective resistor (50 x) ~(AC) 10 V (Spare part NB, ÜB) Signal lamp 4 V AC/DC (50 x) Line sockets, 3-pin + E, grey GDMW Order No

208 Pressure limiter ÜB A4 and NB A Technical description The pressure limiters ÜB A4 and NB A4 are adjustable pressure switches as per EN 1854 for automatic burner controls. They are suitable for switching a circuit on, off or over on changes in actual pressure value relative to the set reference value. The reference value (switching point) is adjusted on a setting wheel provided with a scale. Test nipple integrated in metal housing as standard. Application Pressure monitoring in firing, ventilation and air-conditioning systems. Suitable for gases of families 1,,3 and other neutral gaseous media. Approvals EC type test approval as per EC Gas Appliance Directive: ÜB...A4 CE-0085 AO 30 NB...A4 CE-0085 AO 30 EC type test approval as per EC Pressure Equipment Directive: ÜB...A4 NB...A4 CE0036 CE0036 Approvals in other important gasconsuming countries. Special designs for the North American market with U L, FM and CSA registrations. 1 6

209 Functional description Single-acting pressure limiter in pressure range. The pressure limiters work without using any auxiliary power. ÜB A4, NB A4 pressure limiters The control unit responds to pressure. Interlock is performed when the set reference value is exceeded or undershot. ÜB A4 switching function As pressure rises NO closes, 1 NC opens Glow lamp ON, locked. The "Locked" switching state is indicated by a glow lamp. Restart is only possible by activating the reset button on the setting wheel of the pressure limiter after the operating pressure is attained. NB A4 switching function As pressure falls NO opens, 1 NC closes Glow lamp ON, locked. ÜB A4: Switches and locks when the set pressure is exceeded. NB A4: Switches and locks when the set pressure is undershot. COM 3 1 NO NC COM 3 1 NO NC p N p N Operating state COM NO 6

210 Specifications Max. operating pressure Pressure connection NB, ÜB A4 NB, ÜB 500 A4 Standard: Optional: 500 mbar (50 kpa) 600 mbar (60 kpa) G 1/4 female thread on centre of housing underside as per ISO 8 additionally G 1/4 female thread on opposite measuring connection side Measuring connection Temperature range Test nipple integrated in metal housing, ø 9 Ambient temperature -15 C to +70 C Medium temperature -15 C to +70 C Storage temperature -30 C to +80 C Materials Housing Switch Diaphragms Switching contact aluminium die casting polycarbonate NBR Agr Switching voltage AC eff. min. 10 V max. 50 V DC min. 1 V max. 48 V Nominal current AC eff. 10 A Switching current AC eff. min. 0 ma max. 6 A at cos ϕ 1 AC eff. min. 0 ma max. 3 A at cos ϕ 0,6 DC min. 0 ma max. 1 A Electrical connection Standard: Special design: at screw terminals via PG11 cable gland plug connection for line sockets as per DIN EN , 3-pin with protective contact Degree of protection Adjustment Setting tolerance IP 54 as per IEC 59 (EN 6059) In a vertical position NB A4: As pressure falls ÜB A4: As pressure rises If installation position deviates, note change in switching point ±15% switching point deviation based on the setpoint and with unit installed in a vertical position 3 6

211 Dimensions [mm] ÜB A4, NB A4 ø.5 x 9 dia. deep for equipment plug as per DIN EN ,4 38,4 10,3 18,5 G 1/4 pressure connection 76 53,75 (LK 76) Integrated test nipple ø 9 7 option: pressure connection G 1/4 Reset button Type NB A4 Type ÜB A4 G 1/4 4 X Ø 4, for M4 screws as per ISO 107 SW1 Made in Germany PG11 or plug-type connection for cable socket according to DIN EN ÜB, NB A4/ÜB, NB A4 SW = Wrench width Installation position Standard installation position When installed horizontally, the pressure switch switches at a pressure higher by approx. 0.5 mbar. When installed horizontally overhead, the pressure switch switches at a pressure lower by approx. 0.5 mbar. α When installed in an intermediate installation position, the pressure switch switches at pressure deviating from the set reference value by max. ± 0.5 mbar. 4 6

212 Designation 1 ÜB 150 A4 [Ag-PG-MS9-V0-VS3] Pressure connection V0 Pressure connection G 1/4 Position 0 V3 Pressure connection G 1/4 Position Made in Germany Screw plug VS0 VS3 Screw plug at position 0 Screw plug at position 3 Order example 6 Pressure switch design ÜB pressure limiter Setting range mbar Contact material Ag Electrical connection Cable gland PG11 Test nipple MS 9 Pressure connection G1/4 V0-VS3: an Position 0 and Position 3 with screw plug Instrument gland MS3 Test nipple at position 3 MS9 Test nipple at position 9 Electrical connection PG PG11 cable gland G3 Equipment plug, 3 pin + E Contact material Ag Setting ranges (mbar) NB ÜB X X X X X X Pressure switch design ÜB... A4 Pressure limiter switches and locks if set reference value is exceeded. NB... A4 Pressure limiter switches and locks if set reference value is undershot. ÜB 150 A4 [Ag-PG-MS9-V0-VS3] Accessories for pressure switches NB A4, ÜB A4 Kit: G3 equipment plug, 3-pin + E, NB/ÜB A/A4 Glow lamp with series resistor (50 x) 30 V AC (spare part requirement NB, ÜB) Glow lamp with series resistor (50 x) 10 V AC (spare part requirement NB, ÜB) Signal lamp 4 V AC/DC (50 x) Line socket, 3-pin + E grey GDMW G 1/4 test nipple and seal ring (5 x) G 1/4 screw plug and seal ring (5 x) Metal mounting bracket Mounting Kit Double Pressure Switch Order No

213 Pressure limiter ÜB A4 and NB A4 Technical data 1 mbar = 100 Pa = 0.1 kpa 10 mm WS 1 Pa = 0.01 mbar 0.1 mm WS Type Version [Ag-PG-MS9-V0] Glow lamp ~ (AC) 30 V Order No. Setting range [mbar] Switching difference p [mbar] ÜB A4 pressure limiter ÜB 50 A4 ÜB 150 A4 ÜB 500 A NB A4 pressure limiter NB 50 A4 NB 150 A4 NB 500 A

214 Valve monitoring system VDK 00 A S Technical description The VDK 00 A S0 is the compact valve monitoring system as per EN 1643 for automatic shut-off valves: - Device operates independent of inlet pressure - Test volume 0 l - Setting possible on site - The complete test procedure is defined - Release time: max. 6 s - Tightness or leaks are displayed by an LED - Suitable for TRD systems - Electrical connection at screw terminals via PG 11 cable entry Fields of application Valves according to EN 161 Class A The VDK 00 A S0 may be used with any other valve whose tightness in counter-flow direction excludes by construction a leakage in flow direction. The VDK 00 A S0 is suitable for all DUNGS valves according to EN 161 Class A. For special model for H applications, refer to data sheet 8.1. Suitable for gases of gas families 1,, 3 and other neutral, technical burnable gases. Approvals EC type test approval as per EC Gas Appliance Directive: VDK 00 A CE-0085 AQ 0808 EC type test approval as per EC Pressure Equipment Directive: VDK 00 A CE0036 Approvals in other important gas-consuming countries. Special design for the North American market with U L, FM and CSA registration.

215 VDK 00 A S0 Valve proving system for automatic shut-off valves as per EN 161, Class A Specifications Operating pressure Test volume Pressure increase by motor pump Rated voltage / frequency (admissible voltage range) Power requirements Back-up fuse (provided by customer) Fuse installed in housing cover, replaceable Switching current Observe the starting current of the motor! Degree of protection Ambient temperature Release time Interference time Sensitivity limit Switch-on duration of control Max. number of test cycles Installation position max. 360 mbar (36 kpa) 0,4 l 0,0 l mbar 30 V AC -15% to -40 V +6% 50 Hz For further voltages, refer to type overview During pumping time approx. 80 VA, in operation 0 VA 10 A fast-blow fuse or 6.3 A slow-blow fuse Microfuse T 6.3 L 50 V; IEC-17-/III (DIN 41 66) Operation output Terminal 13: max. 4 A Fault output Terminal 14: max. 1 A IP C to +60 C 10 6 s, depending on test volume and inlet pressure 3 ± 3 s 50 dm3/h or 0.1 % of the burner heat load (> 500 kw) The VDK 00 A S0 can always be used with systems with a burner capacity < 500 kw or a test volume < 6 l. If the system has a burner capacity > 500 kw or a test volume > 6 l, the VDK 00 A S0 can be used only if the burner capacity is higher than the minimum burner capacity specified in the diagram. 100 % 15/h. Wait for at least minutes after carrying out more than 3 consecutive test cycles. vertical to horizontal, not upside down Defining the minimum burner capacity: 1. Determine the test volume (see page 5). Test volume --> Inlet pressure curve 3. Inlet pressure curve --> Reading the minimum burner capacity 4. The VDK 00 A S0 can be used if the burner capacity is higher than the read minimum burner capacity. Min. burner capacity [kw] VDK 00 A limit values 360 mbar 300 mbar 50 mbar 00 mbar 150 mbar Test volume [dm3] 6

216 Program flowchart Regulator Pump motor Solenoid valve Differential pressure switch Release signal VDK 00 A S0 "TIGHT" VPrüf = 1,0 l pe = 0 mbar Regulator Pump motor Solenoid valve Differential pressure switch Release signal VDK 00 A S0 "TIGHT" VPrüf / Test / Prova = 6,0 l pe = 100 mbar Regulator Pump motor Solenoid valve Differential pressure switch Release signal VDK 00 A S0 "TIGHT" VPrüf / Test / Prova = 0,0 l pe = 360 mbar Regulator Pump motor Solenoid valve Differential pressure switch Release signal Fault signal VDK 00 A S0 "LEAK" t test [s] Program flowchart Idle state: Valve V1 and valve V are closed. Pressure build-up: The internal motor pump increases the gas pressure in the test section by about 35mbar compared with the pressure arising on the inlet side at valve V1. During the test period (pump period) the integrated differential pressure switch monitors the test section for leaks. When the test pressure is reached, the motor pump switches off (end of test period), and the yellow LED flashes until the contact is released. The release time (max. 6s) is dependent on test volume (max. 0l) and inlet pressure (max. 360mbar). If the test section is leak-tight, the contact is released to the automatic burner control after 6s and the yellow LED comes on. If the test section is leaky or if the pressure rise by +35 mbar is not reached during the test period (max. 6 s), the VDK 00 A S0 switches to fault. The red signal lamp lights as long as the contact is released by the regulator or thermostat (heat request). An automatic restart is performed on short-term voltage failure during the test or in burner mode. Operation: Valve V1 and valve V are open, the internal valve of VDK 00 A S0 is closed. 3 6

217 Dimensions [mm] Electrical connection VDK 00 A S0 Connection to screw terminals via PG* 11 cable gland (* = heavy-gauge conduit thread) Only use terminals 1, 3, 13 and 14. If you do not observe this instruction, it may result in personal injury or material damage. Made in Germany ø 4.6 for self-pressing screws M5 Typ: VDK 00 A S0 Störung Betrieb Dérangement Fonctionnement Blocco Funzionamento Lockout Run Functional description The VDK 00 A S0 operates according to the pressure build-up principle. The program module starts to function when heat is requested. Test is performed depending on the burner functional procedure: - Test prior to burner start or - Test during pre-purge time or - Test after burner shut-down Function principle The VDK 00 S0 performs a self-test during a switching sequence. Startup 1. Check test section for leaks after assembly.. Start test by using temperature regulator and/or restart or by pressing the reset button on VDK 00 A S0. 3.If the test section is tight Depending on the length of the test section and the residual pressure applied, the pumping time can be up to 6 s. The release for the automatic burner control system is granted at the latest after approx. 6s - the yellow signal light illuminates continuously. If the test section is leaky The test pressure is not reached. The motor pump switches off, the red fault lamp lights up. Switch-through to the automatic burner control does not take place. Functional check By opening a screw plug p (p a ) during the test period (pumping time), leakage can be simulated and a function check can take place. Setting The VDK 00 A S0 is preset at the factory. Setting the VDK 00 A S0 is possible on site. Setting is performed at the externally accessible setting screw. Apply varnish to the setting screw after startup. Keep strictly to the instructions. Assembly The VDK 00 A S0 must be connected to the DUNGS single valves (can be mounted on the right or the left) by means of two steel pipes (ø 1 mm). If an exhaust gas valve is installed in the boiler, it must be open at the beginning of the test. In order to prevent functioning and tightness problems, we recommend to use solenoid valves according to EN 161 Class A. The connection lines between VDK 00 A S0 and the valves must withstand mechanical, chemical and thermal loads. 4 6

218 Using the VDK 00 A S0 at DUNGS individual solenoid valves.../5 We recommend the use of the connection kit, Order No , for mounting the VDK 00 A S0 on the valves Rp 1 1/ to Rp and or/ DN 40 to DN 50. We recommend the use of the connection kit, Order No , for mounting the VDK 00 A S0 on the valves DN 65 to DN 150. The max. test volume of 0 l must not be exceeded. V Test = Valve volume V1 outlet+ + V inlet Volume of pipeline Determining test volume V Test Determine outlet-side volume of V1. Refer to table for Rp 3/8 to DN 00. Determine inlet-side volume of V. Refer to table for Rp 3/8 to DN 00. Determine volume of intermediate pipeline section 3. Refer to table for Rp 3/8 to DN 00. V Test = Volume Valve 1 + Volume Intermediate pipeline section + Volume Valve Determining test volume V Test Rp / DN Valve - Volume [l] V1 outlet + V inlet Test volume [l] = Volume V1 outlet + V inlet + Pipeline length Pipeline lengths between individual valves L [m] 0,5 m 1,0 m 1,5 m,0 m Rp DN Rp DN Rp DN Rp DN Rp DN Rp 3/8 0,01 l 0,06 l 0,11 l 0,16 l 0,1 l Rp 1/ 0,07 l 0,17 l 0,7 l 0,37 l 0,47 l Rp 3/4 (DN 0) 0,1 l 0,7 l 0,4 l 0,57 l 0,7 l Rp 1 (DN 5) 0,0 l 0,45 l 0,70 l 0,95 l 1,0 l Rp 1 1/ / DN 40 0,50 l 0,70 l 1,10 l 1,35 l 1,70 l,00 l,0 l,65 l,80 l 3,30 Rp / DN 50 0,90 l 1,0 l 1,90 l,0 l,90 l 3,0 l 3,90 l 4,0 l 4,90 l 5,50 l DN 65,0 l 3,7 5,30 l 7,00 l 8,60 l DN 80 3,8 6,3 l 8,80 l 11,30 l 13,80 l DN 100 6,5 l 10,5 l 14,40 18,40 l,3 l DN 15 1,0 l 18, l 4,3 l 30,50 l 36,6 l DN ,5 l 6,5 l 35, l 44,10 l 5,9 l DN 00 46,0 l 61,7 l 77,4 l 93,10 l 108,9 l VPS 504 0,1 l V prüf 4,0 l 1 l = 1 dm 3 = 10-3 m 3 VPS 508 1,5 l V prüf 8,0 l VDK 0,4 l V prüf 0,0 l DSLC 1,5 l V prüf 5 6

219 Valve monitoring system VDK 00 A S0 VDK 00 A S0 type overview / accessories / order details Version VDK 00 A S0 VDK 00 A S0 VDK 00 A S0 VDK 00 A S0 30 VAC 50 Hz 110 VAC 50 Hz 40 VAC 50 Hz 10 VAC 60 Hz Order No Hydrogen version VDK 00 A S0 H -version VDK 00 A S0 H -version For specifications, refer to Datasheet VAC 50 Hz 10 VAC 60 Hz Accessories / spare parts Connection kit Rp 1 1/ - Rp DN 40 - DN 50 Connection kit DN 65 - DN 150 Appliance fuse link (5 pieces)

220 P 1 P 1 Control unit for system leakage tests Type VPM-LC (Line Check) 8.30 Test time to max. 1h Number of filling attempts adjustable LED display signals leaking system Multifunction (MFA) output for direct output of various device information Suitable for applications up to SIL. Meets the requirements according to DIN EN 61508:011, Part 1-3. Certified by TÜV Süd VPM LC VPM LC DMV DMV GW 1 P p Klasse S Class S EN 1854 GW MV 3/ P p 1 8 Description The VPM-LC valve test module checks the tightness of the gas line between the central shut-off fitting (safety solenoid valve) and the gas extraction points. The number of filling attempts as well as program times can be adjusted by the user according to the system requirements. Application In laboratories, large-scale catering establishments and process engineering plants. The leakage test is performed before opening a central gas shut-off valve that releases gas supply to several gas-consuming devices. Uncontrolled escape of gas at the various extraction points is thus avoided. Approvals DVGW type examination certificate according to DIN EN and DIN EN 98: DG-4115CM0413 VPM-LC meets the requirements of: DVGW worksheet G61:009-11: Components of gas installations in laboratories and scientific classrooms. DVGW worksheet G634: : Installation of catering gas appliances in premises Machinery Directive 006/4/EC Low Voltage Directive 006/95/EC EMV 004/108/EC CSA approval on request FM Approvals Class 7610

221 VPM-LC Control unit for system leakage tests Equipment: Depending on the chosen equipment option, two pressure switches, double solenoid valve and pilot valve. VPM-LC checks the following parameters before starting: Tightness of the gas line system Closed position of shut-off devices (valves, manual valves/lab equipment) Inlet pressure Monitoring during operation: Power failure Min. gas pressure Pressure switches/valves/pilot valves are not part of the scope of delivery! Technical data Rated voltage (depending on the model) Power consumption Power consumption Typical Backup fuse L1 Humidity Type of protection IP 4 ~ (AC) 30 V +10 % / -15 % Hz ±5 % ~ (AC) 115 V +10 % / -15 % Hz ±5 % max. 10 W 115 V: standby.6 W operation 4.6 W 30 V: standby 3.1 W operation 5.4 W Ambient temperature -0 C bis +60 C Storage temperature -40 C bis +80 C Switch-on duration 100 % Test volume Medium Inlet pressure Multifunction output (MFA) Program sequence Test times can be set Filling attempts Signalling TWI interface Mounting position 6.3A T (10A F), integrated, replaceable DIN , no dewing admissible Unlimited Any; gas type depending on pressure switch and valve Any; depending on pressure switch and valve Number of operating cycles V1 > (terminal , potential-free). Further settings possible via VisionBox + parameter change: 1. Freely selectable number of operating cycles up to 6.5 million (standard 100,000). Signal output while the test is running or while voltage is applied or release for water or power supply. 3. Signal after successful switch-off Line check before start DIP switches can be used to select predefined test times of, enabling optimal setting in case of different test volumes, inlet pressures and leakage rates. Alternatively, individual test times, can be set via VisionBox. Depending on the test volume, different combinations can be selected using DIP switches. Red/green LEDs signal various information on the program and release states or error codes. Plug-in connection for DUNGS VisionBox. The VisionBox can be used to access the VPM via a PC. The VisionBox is hardware and software for VPM parameter setting. Status information and error error memory data can be read out. As desired 8

222 Application information (DVGW worksheet/germany) G 61: G 634: Gas systems in laboratories and scientific classrooms, installation and operation Installation of catering gas appliances in premises. Special requirements for combustion air supply and exhaust gas evacuation Electrical connection Outputs Electrical data The sum of the currents of all safety-related consumers must not exceed 5 A! The sum of the currents of all consumers must not exceed 6.3 A (10 A). 11 V1 Release (bridged to 7) 115/30 VAC / 5 A cos ϕ = 1 Minimum load 0.5 W 6 V1 115/30 VAC / A cos ϕ = 1 Minimum load 0.5 W 10 LGV 115/30 VAC / A cos ϕ = 1 Minimum load 0.5 W Inputs TR External fault 115/30 VAC / 1 A cos ϕ = 1 MFA 115/30 VAC / 1 A cos ϕ = 1 Test request Electrical data 115/30 VAC 13 Pp1 115/30 VAC normally open 14 Pp 115/30 VAC normally closed 1 Remote unlocking 115/30 VAC 3 8

223 Signalling unit Error information Detailed error information via flash codes All LEDs are flashing: RESET SYSTEM TEST SYSTEM STATUS SYSTEM TEST SYSTEM STATUS when a key press is requested during a level change when the VPM is ready for extended unlocking MFT (RESET) = multifunction switch: Unlocking switch for error status max. 5x/15 min. Changeover switch to switch to the password-protected function level for service and OEM parameter setting via TWI interface by means of the VisionBox. SYSTEM TEST two LEDs green / red SYSTEM STATUS two LEDs green / red Switch-on (mains): all LEDs light up as a functional test for approx. 1.5 s. Waiting for test request: Green LED's flashing slowly (4 s off, 0,15 s on). Depending on the states, the LED-V1 and LED-V indicators are flashing or lit constantly Constantly red Off System leaking Red flashing 1x Red flashing 1x Venting error Red flashing x Red flashing x Filling error Red flashing 3x Red flashing 3x Wrong position of DIP switch Red flashing 4x Red flashing 4x Unlock failed Red flashing 5x Red flashing 5x Power at V1.In or V.In before test sequence completed Constantly red Constantly red...all other errors Constantly green Constantly green Release signal 4 8

224 Modification of the program sequence by an application-specific setting of the B/C DIP switches A B C AAAA BBBB CCCC (fixed) (variable) 0110 xxxx xxxx A Test sequence B t test test time C Number of venting or filling attempts 0110 As-delivered configuration s s 0110 Filling s 1001 Filling s The following can be changed via the software: P3 for test time V If this switch position is used, parameter setting should be checked via the VisionBox. t test For the calculation of the test times, see p. 7 Setting must be higher than the calculated time. t DIP > t test When the test times are long, a safety shutdown is already triggered at smaller leakage rates [Qp] Filling 3 The following can be changed via the software: P31: Number of filling operations If this switch position is used, parameter setting should be checked via the VisionBox. For more detailed explanations, see installation examples in the VPM-LC operating and mounting instructions. 5 8

225 Installation examples The functional principle must be selected in accordance with the local regulations! P 1 1 Line check via gas pressure switch without idle state control, DMV GW 1 System component Line check: VPM-LC, Pp according to DIN 1854, Class "S" The manual valves are checked as to whether they are closed. If one of the manual valves is open, no pressure can built up. Tightness of the DMV cannot be checked. DMV VPM LC P p Klasse S Class S EN 1854 GW1 S1 DMV REMOTE RESET NO NC Pp1 FAULT COM FAULT F1! MULTI COM MULTI Pp Klasse S EN 1854 DIP-Mode: A: 0110 B: xxxx C: , ➊ 1001 Parameter: --- Direct line check via gas pressure switch with idle state control, MV System component Valve check: VPM-LC, Pp, shutter, MV 3/ A shutter diametre of 0.3 mm and pe = 50 mbar results in a leakage rate Q P = 16 L air /h The manual valves are checked as to whether they are closed. If one of the manual valves is open, no pressure can built up. Leakage rate Qp = 16 l air /h with shutter diametre 0.3 pe = 50 mbar N L1 DMV VPM LC GW1 REMOTE RESET NO NC FAULT COM FAULT MULTI COM MULTI DIP-Mode: A: 0110 B: xxxx C: , ➊ 1001 Parameter: P15 = 1 P 1 GW 1 1 Pp1 0 MV 3/ P p DMV MV 3/ S1 L1 N Attention ➊: If this switch position is used, parameter setting should be checked via the VisionBox. 6 8

226 Calculation, individual setting of the test time or DIP switch group BBBB p e V p In (p e / (p e - p s1 )) t test = s/h S p atm Q p t p3 = t test 16/s xxxx 1100 xxxx xxxx 0110 xxxx xxxx 1001 xxxx xxxx 0011 xxxx DIP mode for pre-defined test times. Setting must be higher than V P [dm 3 ] the calculated time: t DIP > t test Individual setting of the test time via the software: Select DIP mode xxxx 0011 xxxx. Enter the value calculated for t P3 in P3. t test [s] Test time for V (manual valves) Q P [dm 3 /h] p s1 [mbar] Test volume between the valves to be monitored Admissible leakage rate according to EN1643. The leakage rate corresponds to 0.1 % of the burner's gas consumption at maximum burner load, but at least 50 dm 3 /h. A limit value of 00 dm 3 /h is recommended by DUNGS! Increasing switching pressure +15 % t p3 [ ] To be entered in P3 Select higher value! p atm [mbar] Atmospheric pressure = 1013 mbar S - Safety factor: DUNGS recommenda 3 Vp determination of the test volume Vp Depending on the selected installation (for examples, see page 8) Include all valve and pipeline volumes of the test section. 1. Determine the DMV volume on the outlet side. For Rp 1/ - DN 80, see operating and mounting instructions.. Determine the volume of the manual valves on the inlet side. For Rp 1/ - DN 80, see operating and mounting instructions. 3. Determine the volume of all connecting pipe sections (3) For Rp 1/ - DN 80, see operating and mounting instructions. 4. If present, determine the volume of the pilot valves. 5. VP = Σ P 1 GW 1 DMV VPM LC 1 0 MV 3/ P p 7 8

227 Control unit for system leakage tests Type VPM-LC (Line Check) Version Description Order No. Complete device VPM-LC cpl. 30 VAC VPM-LC cpl. 115 VAC Top part VPM-LC 30 VAC VPM-LC 115 VAC Base 1 piece piece Dimensions Installation 150 ø 4,5 Hat rail mounting Mounting rail 35 mm x ø for PG 9 38, x ø for M16 x Mounting bores ø 4.5 Screw ø Accessories Gas pressure switch Depending on the operating pressure, see data sheets LGW...A4 (5.08) GW...A6 (5.01) GW...A4 HP (5.04) Pilot solenoid valves see data sheets DMV... (7.30, 7.37, 7.38), MV 50 (6.1) MVD... (6.0) Pilot valve 3/ way solenoid valve/mv... MPA VisionBox As addition to MPA parameterisation and service box for setting VPM parameters via a PC/laptop. 8 8

228 Two-stage safety solenoid valves ZRLE/5, ZRDLE/ Technical description The DUNGS safety solenoid valve ZR... is a two-stage automatic shut-off valve as per EN 161 for gas burners and gas appliances. - Max. operating pressure up to 360 mbar (36 kpa) - Class A, Group as per EN mormally closed - Fast closing - Slow opening with adjustable fast stroke for start gas volume: ZRLE and ZRDLE - Main and partial volumes adjustable: ZRDLE - DC solenoid, rectifier wiring with radio interference suppression in terminal box - Mountable closed position signal contact to monitor closed position of valve - Pipe thread as per ISO 7/1 - Flange connection as per DIN EN Reliable function, rugged and maintenance-free Application The solenoid valve is used for securing, limiting, shutting off and releasing gas supply to gas burners and gas appliances. The DUNGS safety solenoid valve ZR... is suitable for gases of families 1,, 3 and other neutral gaseous media. Approval EC type test approval as per EC Gas Appliance Directive: ZR 4../5 CE-0085 AQ715 Approvals in other important gas consuming countries.

229 ZRLE/5 ZRDLE/5 Two-stage solenoid valve, normally when closed, slow opening with adjustable fast stroke, fast closing. Partial volume adjustable. Closed position signal contact mountable. Two-stage solenoid valve, normally when closed, slow opening with adjustable fast stroke, fast closing. Main volume adjustable. Partial volume adjustable. Closed position signal contact mountable. Specifications Nominal diameters Pipe thread as per ISO 7/1 Flange Max. operating pressure Solenoid valve Closing time Opening time Fast stroke Main volume adjustment Partial volume adjustment Materials of gas-conveying parts Voltage/frequency Rating / power consumption Switch-on duration Degree of protection Electrical connection Switching rate Measuring/ignition gas connection Dirt trap Ambient temperature Installation position Closed position signal contact Valve proving system Accessories DN Rp 3/ / Connection flange as per DIN EN up to 360 mbar (36 kpa) Valve as per EN 161, Class A, Group, two-stage mode, EN 1531 < 1 s for ZRLE and ZRDLE approx. 0 s at approx. +0 C and without fast stroke Manually adjustable for ZRLE and ZRDLE Manually adjustable for ZRDLE Manually adjustable for ZRLE and ZRDLE Housing: aluminium, steel, brass Seals: NBR basis Hz, 30 V AC (+10% -15%); further voltages on request Refer to type overview 100% IP 54, IP 65 on request At screw terminals via PG* 11 cable gland (* = heavy-gauge conduit thread) ZRLE 4 /5, ZRDLE 4 /5: max. 100/h G 1/4 ISO 8, on both sides in inlet section, additionally G 3/4 on inlet side, from size DN 40 (flange) upwards Sieve installed, mesh width 1 mm -15 C to +60 C Solenoid from vertically upright to horizontally lying Type K01/1, DIN-tested Type VDK 00 A S0, mountable via G 1/4 test connection, Type VPS 504, mountable on housing Rp 3/4 to Rp with adapter K01 closed position signal contact, see Datasheet

230 Dimensions [mm] Type DN/Rp P max. [VA] Order No. DN f ø a DN c e f ø a c d = largest width b b I max. ~(AC) 30 V I max. ~(AC) 30 V Opening time Dimensions [mm] a b c d e f Weight [kg] ZRLE 407/5 ZRLE 410/5 ZRLE 415/5 ZRLE 40/5 360 mbar Rp 3/4 Rp 1 Rp 11/ Rp s 0 s 0 s 0 s ZRDLE 407/5 ZRDLE 410/5 ZRDLE 415/5 ZRDLE 40/5 ZRDLE 4040/5 ZRDLE 4050/5 360 mbar Rp 3/4 Rp 1 Rp 11/ Rp DN 40 DN s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s

231 Electrical connection ZRDLE sectional drawing Housing Sieve 3 Valve plate 4 Closing spring 5 Armature, stage 6 Solenoid, stage 7 Armature, stage 1 8 Solenoid, stage 1 9 Electrical connection Setting 10 - Stage Stage 1 - Fast stroke 13 Hydraulic brake p 1 p Functional description The DUNGS safety solenoid valve is an automatic shut-off valve operated with auxiliary power. The electromagnetic drive opens against the force of the closing spring 4. The stroke of armature 7 can be limited by the setting screw. The hydraulic brake 13 permits slow opening. Fast stroke 1 can be adjusted. If voltage is applied to the solenoid of stage 1, armature 7 opens up to the adjusted partial volume. If voltage is applied to the solenoid of stage, armature 5 opens up to the adjusted main volume. If the auxiliary power is interrupted (operating voltage), closing spring 4 closes the valve within 1 second. The closed position of the valve can be monitored by a mountable closed position signal contact. 4 6

232 Opening behaviour of ZR.../5 V Stage II. ZRLE /5 ZRDLE /5 Stage I. ZRLE /5 ZRDLE /5 t Flow velocity V verwendetes Gas/gas used/ gaz utilisé/gas utilizzato = V Luft/air/air/aria x f Gasart Type of gas Type de gaz Tipo di gas Dichte Spec. Wgt. poids spécifique Peso specifico [kg/m 3 ] dv f 5 6 f = Dichte Luft Spec. weight air poids spécifique de l air peso specifico aria Dichte des verwendeten Gases Spec. weight of gas used poids spécifique du gaz utilisé peso specifico del gas utilizzato Erdgas/Nat.Gas/ Gaz naturel/gas metano Stadtgas/City gas/ Gaz de ville/gas città Flüssiggas/LPG/ Gaz liquide/gas liquido Luft/Air/ Air/Aria

233 Two-stage safety solenoid valves ZRLE/5, ZRDLE/5 Flow diagram 6 6

234 Two-stage safety solenoid valves ZRLE/5, ZRDLE/ Technical description The DUNGS safety solenoid valve ZR... is a two-stage automatic shut-off valve as per EN 161 for gas burners and gas appliances. - Max. operating pressure up to 360 mbar (36 kpa) - Class A, Group as per EN mormally closed - Fast closing - Slow opening with adjustable fast stroke for start gas volume: ZRLE and ZRDLE - Main and partial volumes adjustable: ZRDLE - DC solenoid, rectifier wiring with radio interference suppression in terminal box - Mountable closed position signal contact to monitor closed position of valve - Pipe thread as per ISO 7/1 - Flange connection as per DIN EN Reliable function, rugged and maintenance-free Application The solenoid valve is used for securing, limiting, shutting off and releasing gas supply to gas burners and gas appliances. The DUNGS safety solenoid valve ZR... is suitable for gases of families 1,, 3 and other neutral gaseous media. Approval EC type test approval as per EC Gas Appliance Directive: ZR 4../5 CE-0085 AQ715 Approvals in other important gas consuming countries.

235 ZRLE/5 ZRDLE/5 Two-stage solenoid valve, normally when closed, slow opening with adjustable fast stroke, fast closing. Partial volume adjustable. Closed position signal contact mountable. Two-stage solenoid valve, normally when closed, slow opening with adjustable fast stroke, fast closing. Main volume adjustable. Partial volume adjustable. Closed position signal contact mountable. Specifications Nominal diameters Pipe thread as per ISO 7/1 Flange Max. operating pressure Solenoid valve Closing time Opening time Fast stroke Main volume adjustment Partial volume adjustment Materials of gas-conveying parts Voltage/frequency Rating / power consumption Switch-on duration Degree of protection Electrical connection Switching rate Measuring/ignition gas connection Dirt trap Ambient temperature Installation position Closed position signal contact Valve proving system Accessories DN Rp 3/ / Connection flange as per DIN EN up to 360 mbar (36 kpa) Valve as per EN 161, Class A, Group, two-stage mode, EN 1531 < 1 s for ZRLE and ZRDLE approx. 0 s at approx. +0 C and without fast stroke Manually adjustable for ZRLE and ZRDLE Manually adjustable for ZRDLE Manually adjustable for ZRLE and ZRDLE Housing: aluminium, steel, brass Seals: NBR basis Hz, 30 V AC (+10% -15%); further voltages on request Refer to type overview 100% IP 54, IP 65 on request At screw terminals via PG* 11 cable gland (* = heavy-gauge conduit thread) ZRLE 4 /5, ZRDLE 4 /5: max. 100/h G 1/4 ISO 8, on both sides in inlet section, additionally G 3/4 on inlet side, from size DN 40 (flange) upwards Sieve installed, mesh width 1 mm -15 C to +60 C Solenoid from vertically upright to horizontally lying Type K01/1, DIN-tested Type VDK 00 A S0, mountable via G 1/4 test connection, Type VPS 504, mountable on housing Rp 3/4 to Rp with adapter K01 closed position signal contact, see Datasheet

236 Dimensions [mm] Type DN/Rp P max. [VA] Order No. DN f ø a DN c e f ø a c d = largest width b b I max. ~(AC) 30 V I max. ~(AC) 30 V Opening time Dimensions [mm] a b c d e f Weight [kg] ZRLE 407/5 ZRLE 410/5 ZRLE 415/5 ZRLE 40/5 360 mbar Rp 3/4 Rp 1 Rp 11/ Rp s 0 s 0 s 0 s ZRDLE 407/5 ZRDLE 410/5 ZRDLE 415/5 ZRDLE 40/5 ZRDLE 4040/5 ZRDLE 4050/5 360 mbar Rp 3/4 Rp 1 Rp 11/ Rp DN 40 DN s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s

237 Electrical connection ZRDLE sectional drawing Housing Sieve 3 Valve plate 4 Closing spring 5 Armature, stage 6 Solenoid, stage 7 Armature, stage 1 8 Solenoid, stage 1 9 Electrical connection Setting 10 - Stage Stage 1 - Fast stroke 13 Hydraulic brake p 1 p Functional description The DUNGS safety solenoid valve is an automatic shut-off valve operated with auxiliary power. The electromagnetic drive opens against the force of the closing spring 4. The stroke of armature 7 can be limited by the setting screw. The hydraulic brake 13 permits slow opening. Fast stroke 1 can be adjusted. If voltage is applied to the solenoid of stage 1, armature 7 opens up to the adjusted partial volume. If voltage is applied to the solenoid of stage, armature 5 opens up to the adjusted main volume. If the auxiliary power is interrupted (operating voltage), closing spring 4 closes the valve within 1 second. The closed position of the valve can be monitored by a mountable closed position signal contact. 4 6

238 Opening behaviour of ZR.../5 V Stage II. ZRLE /5 ZRDLE /5 Stage I. ZRLE /5 ZRDLE /5 t Flow velocity V verwendetes Gas/gas used/ gaz utilisé/gas utilizzato = V Luft/air/air/aria x f Gasart Type of gas Type de gaz Tipo di gas Dichte Spec. Wgt. poids spécifique Peso specifico [kg/m 3 ] dv f 5 6 f = Dichte Luft Spec. weight air poids spécifique de l air peso specifico aria Dichte des verwendeten Gases Spec. weight of gas used poids spécifique du gaz utilisé peso specifico del gas utilizzato Erdgas/Nat.Gas/ Gaz naturel/gas metano Stadtgas/City gas/ Gaz de ville/gas città Flüssiggas/LPG/ Gaz liquide/gas liquido Luft/Air/ Air/Aria

239 Two-stage safety solenoid valves ZRLE/5, ZRDLE/5 Flow diagram 6 6

240 Valve testing system VPS 508 for multiple actuators 8.13 Technical description The VPS 508 is the valve proving system for DUNGS multiple actuators. The valve proving system complies with EN 1643: - Equipment operates independent of residual pressure in the range of the permissible operating range. - Test volume 8 l - Setting work not necessary on site - Short test period: min. 10 s, max. 34 s - Tightness or leaks are displayed by an LED - External fault display possible for series 04 and S05 - Suitable for TRD systems - Electrical connection possible by plug connection S03. No rewiring is required for contact allocation as per DIN S04 and S05: electrical connection at screw terminals via PG 13.5 cable entry Application Valve proving system for DUNGS single valves, DMV double solenoid valve and GasMultiBloc MB. The VPS 508 can also be used for monitoring the DUNGS solenoid valves up to DN 100, with and without bypass connection. 4 VDC design for gas motors. Suitable for gases of gas families 1,, 3 and other neutral gaseous media. Approvals EC type test approval as per EC Gas Appliance Directive: VPS 508 CE-0085 AP 0168 EC type test approval as per EC Pressure Equipment Directive: VPS 508 CE0036 Approvals in other important gas consuming countries. 1 1

241 VPS 508 Valve proving system for automatic shutoff valves as per EN 161, Class A and Class B The VPS 508 may be used with any other valve whose tightness in counter-flow direction excludes by construction a leakage in flow direction. The VPS 508 is suitable for all DUNGS valves according to EN 161 Classes A and B. Specifications Operating pressure Test volume Pressure increase by motor pump Nominal voltage, Frequency Rating requirement Prefuse (provided by customer) Fuse installed in housing cover, replaceable Switching current Degree of protection Ambient temperature Release time Sensitivity limit Switch-on duration of control Max. number of test cycles Installation position Media max. 500 mbar (50 kpa) 1.5 l 8.0 l 0 mbar refer to type overview page 11 During pumping time approx. 60 VA, in operation 17 VA 10 A quick-acting or 6.3 A slow-acting fuse Microfuse 6.3 slow-blow L 50 V; IEC-17-/III (DIN 41 66) Operating output VPS 508 S03, S04, S05: max. 4 A Refer to motor startup current! Interference output VPS 508 S04, S05: max.1a VPS 508 S03: IP 40 VPS 508 S04, S05: IP Hz 30 VAC -15 C to +70 C others: -15 C to +60 C Approx s, depending on test volume and input pressure max. 50 l/h At inlet pressures of < 50 mbar, limit pressure rates well below 50 l of air per hour occur due to the mode of operation. This allows for applications involving low inlet pressures. 100 % ED 10/h. Wait for at least minutes after carrying out more than 3 consecutive test cycles. vertical, horizontal, not upside down Gas families 1,, 3, sewage gas, landfill gas and biogas (dry, HS < 0.1 % by volume) and other gaseous media Not for gases having a butane content of > 60 % 1

242 VPS 508 sectional diagram DMV Series V1 V p VPS 508 p1 + 0 mbar p p 1 1 Hall switch Solenoid 3 Pressure switch diaphragms 4 Compression spring 5 Filter 6 Solenoid valve anchor 7 Solenoid valve coil 8 Pressure pump 9 Unlock switch 10 Fault lamp 11 Operating lamp 1 Test nipple 13 Volume restrictor 14 Pump diaphragm 15 Pump linkage 16 PCB 17 Plug connection 18 Equipment fuse 19 Spare fuse 3 1

243 Functional description The VPS 508 operates depending on pressure build-up. The program module starts to function when heat is requested. Test is performed depending on the burner functional procedure: Function principle p = 500 mbar max. Check prior to burner start or Check during pre-purge period or Check after burner shut-down A Program module Instrument gland Connection p1 pe V1 DMV-D(LE) A p pa V VPS 508 p1 pe p pa Release period t F Period which a VPS requires to perform a complete operation procedure. The release period of the VPS 508 depends on test volume and input pressure: t F max. 34 s Test period t test Pumping time of motor pump. Test volume V Test Volume between V1 output-side and V input-side and the intermediate tube pieces. p V test min. / VPS 508 = 1,5 l V test max. / VPS 508 = 8 l = 500 mbar max. Release period p1 pe p e tf [s] V1 Program modul 1 p pa p = 500 mbar max. Field of application p = 500 mbar max. p1 pe V V1 V p1 pe p e p1 pe p e V1 Program modul VPS 508 Program modul p 1 /p e = 500 mbar p pa p 1 /p e = 300 mbar p 1 /p e = 00 mbar p 1 /p e = 100 mbar p 1 /p e = 0 mbar p pa p + 0 mbar e p pa V Test volume V prüf [l] Program sequence p1 pe VPS 508 p pa p1 pe VPS 508 p pa p e p e p + 0 mbar e p e p e p e p = 500 mbar max. V1 V p = 500 mbar max. V1 V p = 500 mbar max. V1 V p1 pe Program modul p pa Idle state p1 pe Program modul p pa Pressure build-up p1 pe Program modul p pa Operation VPS 508 VPS 508 VPS 508 p1 pe p pa p1 pe p pa p1 pe p pa p = 500 mbar max. p e p + 0 mbar e Idle state: Valves 1 and are closed. Pressure build-up: The internal motor pump increases V1 the gas Vpressure in the test section by approx. 0 mbar p max. compared p1 to the input-side p pressure pe Program modul pa applied to valve V1. During the test period, the installed differential VPS 508 pressure switch monitors = 500 mbar p1 p the test section for leakage. If the test pe pa pressure is attained, the motor pump is switched off (end of test period). The p p p e e e release time (10-34 s) depends on the p e p e p e test volume (max. 8.0 l) and input pressure (max. 500 mbar). If the test section is tight, the contact V1 is released V to the automatic burner control after max. 34 p1 p s - the pe yellow Program signal modul lamp lights up. pa If the test section is leaky or if the pressure increase by + 0 mbar is not attained VPS 508 during the test period (max. 34 s), the p1 p VPS 508 pe switches to fault. pa The red signal lamp lights as long as the contact release by the regulator or thermostat is present (heat requirement). If there is a short power failure during the test or burner operation, the test is started again automatically. If the pumping time < approx. 10s, the pressure difference between the testing system and the inlet pressure is balanced after pumping is finished. Operation: The internal valve of the VPS 508 is closed. 4 1 p = 500 mbar max. V1 V

244 Program flowchart Regulator Pump motor Solenoid valve Differential pressure switch Release signal Regulator Pump motor Solenoid valve Differential pressure switch Release signal Regulator Pump motor Solenoid valve Differential pressure switch Release signal Fault signal VPS 508 "TIGHT" VPS 508 "TIGHT" VPS 508 "LEAKY" VPrüf =,0 l VPrüf = 8,0 l t test [s] 5 1

245 Electrical connection VPS 508 S03 The VPS 508 S03 is connected in series between the temperature regulator and the control box via a 7-pin plug connector. The pin assignment of the connector between burner and boiler is specified in DIN For contact assignment, refer to wiring diagram.if the heat generator is wired to DIN 4791,no boiler or burner rewiring is required for electrical connection. Connect the burner connector to the floating connector of the VPS 508 S03. Connect the VPS 508 S03 connector to the floating connector on the heat generator. If there is a fault signal at S3 (burner fault), the regulator chain is bridged via an additional relay in VPS 508 S03 on the burner side. At the same time, the operating voltage of VPS 508 S03 is interrupted. After eliminating the burner fault, the valve testing system can be started again. Only connect the incoming fault signal from the igniter of the burner control to port S3. If this is not observed, damage or injury may result. Therefore, please keep to the instructions. F1 F F3 H1 H Fuse Sensor or limiter Regulator Fault signal Operation signal P1 Operating hours meter stage 1 S1 Switch X1B Connector, female X1S Connector, male Solenoid valve Burner operation Fault Regulator N Pe L B4 S3 T T1 N L Burner female connector (X 1B) B4 S3 T T1 N L Control line 7 x 1 Male connector (cable to cable) VPS 508 (X 1S) Operation VPS 508 S03 internal exchangeable fuse: T 6,3 L 50 V IEC 17-/III (DIN 4166) D5 x B4 S3 T T1 N L B4 S3 T T1 N L Female connector (fixed) VPS 508 (X 1B) Male connector of heat generator (X 1S) h P1 H H1 S P F3 S P F S1 F1 6 1

246 Electrical connection VPS 508 S04 PG 13.5 cable duct and connection to screw terminals below cover in housing (see Dimensions VPS 508 S04, S05). VPS 508 S04 internal leaky tight V3 P Floating control room signal may only be used for signalling, never for burner release. NC COM NO B L1 N } Floating fault signal (control room signal) Release signal Operating voltage Operating voltage 30 V AC 50 Hz Zero conductor Groung exchangeable fuse: 6.3 slow-blow L 50 V as per IEC 17-/III (DIN 4166) D5 x 0 Electrical connection VPS 508 S05 PG 13.5 cable duct and connection to screw terminals below cover in housing (see Dimensions VPS 508 S04, S06). Operating voltage range 0 V - 30 V DC. Refer to motor startup current! VPS 508 series 05 internal I max./maxi.: B : 4A S : 1A S Falut signal leaky tight V3 P B + Release signal Operating voltage = (DC) 4 V exchangeable fuse: 6.3 slow-blow L 50 V as per IEC 17-/III (DIN 4166) D5 x 0 Test volume of DUNGS multiple actuators DMV-..., MBC-... Type Rp/DN Test volume [l] Type Rp/DN Test volume [l] DMV-D(LE) 5080/11 DMV-D(LE) 5100/11 DMV-D(LE) 515/11 DMV-D(LE) 5065/1 DMV-D(LE) 5080/1 DMV-D(LE) 5100/1 DMV-D(LE) 515/1 DN 80 DN 100 DN 15 DN 65 DN 80 DN 100 DN 15 1,47 l,8 l 3,56 l 1,47 l,8 l 3,55 l 6,00 l MBC 1900 MBC 3100 MBC 5000 MBC 7000 DN 65 DN 80 DN 100 DN 15 1,47 l,8 l 3,55 l 6,00 l 7 1

247 Use of VPS 508 at DUNGS single valves. Determining the test volume. When mounting the VPS 508 on single valves DN 40-DN 100, the adapter set is required, Ordering No V test = Volumen valve 1 + Volumen intermediate pipe part + Volumen valve The max. test volume of 8 l must not be exceeded. Determining the test volume V test 1. Determine the output volume of V1 (refer to table).. Determine the input volume of V (refer to table). 3. Determine the volume of the intermediate pipe part 3 (refer to table). V Test = Valve volume V1 outlet+ + V inlet Volume of pipeline Demetering test volume V Test L [m] V1 3 1 V Instrument gland Connection 1 Volume V1 p1 pe Adapter Nr. 740 VPS 508 p pa 3 Volume V Volume Intermediate pipe part V1 < > V p1 pe p pa Rp / DN Valve - Volume [l] V1 outlet + V inlet Test volume [l] = Volume V1 outlet + V inlet + Pipeline length Pipeline lengths between individual valves L [m] 0,5 m 1,0 m 1,5 m,0 m Rp DN Rp DN Rp DN Rp DN Rp DN Rp 3/8 0,01 l 0,06 l 0,11 l 0,16 l 0,1 l Rp 1/ 0,07 l 0,17 l 0,7 l 0,37 l 0,47 l Rp 3/4 (DN 0) 0,1 l 0,7 l 0,4 l 0,57 l 0,7 l Rp 1 (DN 5) 0,0 l 0,45 l 0,70 l 0,95 l 1,0 l Rp 1 1/ / DN 40 0,50 l 0,70 l 1,10 l 1,35 l 1,70 l,00 l,0 l,65 l,80 l 3,30 l Rp / DN 50 0,90 l 1,0 l 1,90 l,0 l,90 l 3,0 l 3,90 l 4,0 l 4,90 l 5,50 l DN 65,0 l 3,7 l 5,30 l 7,00 l 8,60 l DN 80 3,8 l 6,3 l 8,80 l 11,30 l 13,80 l DN 100 6,5 l 10,5 l 14,40 l 18,40 l,3 l DN 15 1,0 l 18, l 4,3 l 30,50 l 36,6 l DN ,5 l 6,5 l 35, l 44,10 l 5,9 l DN 00 46,0 l 61,7 l 77,4 l 93,10 l 108,9 l PageNo 0,1 l V prüf 4,0 l 1 l = 1 dm 3 = 10-3 m VPS 508 1,5 l V prüf 8,0 l VDK 0,4 l V prüf 0,0 l DSLC 1,5 l V prüf 8 1

248 Startup 1. Check test section for leaks after assembly.. Start test by using temperature regulator and/or restart or by pressing the reset button of VPS If the test section is tight Depending on the length of the test section and the residual pressure applied, the pumping time is between 3 s and 34 s. The release for the automatic burner control is then given after approx. 10 s at the earliest (at small test volumes and small input pressures) and after approx. 34 s at the latest (at large test volumes and large input pressures) - the yellow signal lamp lights up. If the test section is leaky The test pressure is not attained. The motor pump switches off, the red fault lamp lights up. Switch-through to the automatic burner control does not take place. Functional check By opening a screw plug in test nipple p (p a ) during test period (pumping time), leakage can be simulated and a function check can take place. Setting The VPS 508 must not be adjusted on site. Assembly Directly flange the VPS 508 laterally to the DUNGS multiple actuators (mounting is possible on left-hand or right-hand side) using two 10.5 x.5 O rings and four M4 x 16 self-tapping screws. If an exhaust gas valve is installed in the boiler, it must be open at the beginning of the test. In order to prevent functional and leakage problems, we recommend the use of solenoid valves as per EN 161 Class A and Class B. Insufficiently shielded frequency converters could cause faults in the VPS due to network disturbances. Make provisions for sufficient electrical shielding. 9 1

249 Dimensions [mm] VPS 508 S03 16,5 Sicherung eingebaut, auswechselbar Fuse built into housing, exchangeable Fusibile integré dans la couvercle du boîtier interchangeable Typ/Type/Type/Tipo T 6,3 L 50 V 100 Betriebsanleitung beachten! Please comply with the operating instructions! Suivre les instructions de la notice d'utilisation! Seguire le istruzioni! 147 Female connection X1B as per DIN 4791 p Ø 9 p 1 Dimensions [mm] VPS 508 S04, S05 Fuse 16,5 Cover, electrical connection Additionally, PG 11 cable duct possibile pe pa Ø 9 p p 1 4,3 53, pe pa 13 4,3 53,7 7 5 pe test nipple pa test nipple Störung Dérangement Blocco Lockout 147 Typ: VPS 508 Serie 03 Betrieb Fonctionamento Funziamento Run Spare fuses Connector X1S as per DIN 4791 Suction connection (gas input) Pressure connection (to test section) Standard: cable duct PG 13,5 13 Spar fuse pe test nipple Störung pa test nipple Dérangement Blocco Lockout Typ: VPS 508 S04 Betrieb Fonctionamento Funziamento Run Achtung, Warning, Attention, Attentione Vor dem Öffnen ist das Gerät stromlos zu schalten Before opening switch off power supply Ouverture uniquement hors tension Prima di apire l'aparecchio togliere la corrente Suction connection (gas input) Pressure connection (to test section) 10 1

250 VPS 508 type overview / accessories / order data Version VPS 508 Series Nominal voltage, Frequency 0-30 VDC 30 V -15 % 40 V +6 % 50 Hz 110 V -15 % +10 % 50 Hz VPS 508 S03 7-pole plug connection Wiring as per DIN 4791 IP 40 degree of protection Cable length: 1.50 m VPS 508 S04 Connection to screw terminals PG 13.5 cable duct Additionally, PG 11 possible Floating fault signal (control room signal) IP 54 degree of protection VPS 508 S05 (Gasmotors) Accessories/spare parts Adapter kit VPS 504 for solenoid valves Adapter kit VPS / VDK for solenoid valves Mounting kit (4 x M4 x 16,, x O-Ring, x filter insert) Appliance fuse link (5 pieces) Spare parts set VPS filter

251 Control unit for system leakage tests Type VPM-VC (Valve Check) 8. VPM VC LGV (NO) VPM VC P p V3 V V4 GW 1 V1 V P p GW 1 V Description The VPM-VC valve test module checks the tightness of burner gas shut-off valves in combination with one or two pressure switches. The test is performed in accordance with EN The program sequence, filling and venting parameters as well as program times can be adjusted by the user according to the system requirements. Application The VPM-VC has been designed for automatic leak testing between two solenoid valves in gas-consuming devices, either prior to start-up or after switching off the system. The test system can be used as a single leakage tester or in combination with automatic burners. It is used in gas burner systems for heating, process heating, process industry and gas engines. Approvals EC type-examination certificate according to the EC Gas Appliances Directive (009/14/EC): VPM-VC CE-0085 CM 040 EC type-examination certificate according to the EC Pressure Equipment Directive: VPM-VC CE0036 The VPM meets the requirements of: - Machinery Directive 006/4/EC - Low Voltage Directive 006/95/EC - EMV 004/108/EC Approvals in other important gas-consuming countries. CSA approval on request FM Approvals Class 7610

252 VPM-VC Control unit for system leakage tests according to En Checks tightness of the gas burner shut-off valves either before burner start or after shutdown. Equipment: one or two gas pressure switches. Additional pilot valves are required depending on the system Pressure switches/valves/pilot valves are not part of the scope of delivery! Technical data Rated voltage (depending on the model) Power consumption Power consumption Typical ~ (AC) 30 V +10 % / -15 % Hz ±5 % ~ (AC) 115 V +10 % / -15 % Hz ±5 % max. 10 W 115 V: standby.6 W operation 4.6 W 30 V: standby 3.1 W operation 5.4 W 6.3 A T (10 A F), integrated, replaceable DIN , no dewing admissible Backup fuse L1 Humidity Type of protection IP 4 Ambient temperature -0 C to +60 C Storage temperature -40 C to +80 C Switch-on duration 100 % Operational altitude Suitable for use up to 000 metres above sea level Test volume Unlimited Medium Any; gas type depending on pressure switch and valve Inlet pressure Any; depending on pressure switch and valve Multifunction output (MFA) Number of operating cycles V1 > (terminal , potential-free). Further settings possible via VisionBox + parameter change: 1. Freely selectable number of operating cycles up to 6.5 million (standard 100,000). Signal output with freely selectable number of operating cycles of V, LGV or release 3. Signal output while the test is running or while voltage is applied 4. Signal after successful switch-off Program sequence can be selected Three different program sequences can be selected via DIP switches: 1. Valve test before burner start. Valve test after burner switch-off 3. Test sequence with optimised valve operating cycles after burner switchoff without additional switching cycles. In this case, only one valve will be tested at a time after successful switch-off, --> lower power consumption and increased valve life. Test times can be set DIP switches can be used to select predefined test times of V1 and V, enabling optimal setting in case of different test volumes, inlet pressures and leakage rates. Alternatively, individual test times, even different times for V1 and V, can be set via VisionBox. Filling and venting attempts Depending on the test volume, different combinations can be selected using DIP switches. Signalling for V1 and V Red/green LEDs signal various information on the program and release states or error codes. TWI interface Plug-in connection for DUNGS VisionBox. The VisionBox can be used to access the VPM via a PC. The VisionBox is hardware and software for VPM parameter setting. Status information and error error memory data can be read out. Mounting position As desired 10

253 Application information EN 676: EN 746-: EN 1643: requests tightness checks at burner capacities above 1,00 kw or already at capacities from 70 kw for burners without pre-purging. requests the use of a VPM for some applications. Pre-venting of the burner chamber can be omitted when using a VPM. Venting of the furnace is done to the atmosphere. in combination with a VPM, venting may be done into the furnace for max. 3 s. Wiring scheme Outputs Electrical data The sum of the currents of all safety-related consumers must not exceed 5 A! The sum of the currents of all consumers must not exceed 6.3 A (10 A). 11 Release 115/30 VAC / 5 A cos ϕ = 1 Minimum load 0.5 W 6 V1 115/30 VAC / A cos ϕ = 1 Minimum load 0.5 W 8 V 115/30 VAC / A cos ϕ = 1 Minimum load 0.5 W 10 LGV 115/30 VAC / A cos ϕ = 1 Minimum load 0.5 W Inputs External 115/30 VAC / 1 A cos ϕ = 1 fault MFA 115/30 VAC / 1 A cos ϕ = 1 Electrical data 4 TR Test 115/30 VAC request 13 Pp1 115/30 VAC (NO) 14 Pp 115/30 VAC (NC) 1 Remote unlocking 115/30 VAC 7 V1_In 115/30 VAC 9 V_In 115/30 VAC 3 10

254 Signalling unit Error information Detailed error information via flash codes All LEDs are flashing: RESET V V1 V V1 when a key press is requested during a level change MFT (RESET) = multifunction switch: Unlocking switch for error status max. 5x/15 min. Changeover switch to switch to the password-protected function level for service and OEM parameter setting via TWI interface by means of the VisionBox. V two LEDs green / red V1 two LEDs green / red Switch-on (mains): All LEDs light up as a functional test for approx. 1.5 s. Waiting for test request: Green LED's flashing slowly (4 s off, 0,15 s on). Depending on the states, the LED-V1 and LED-V indicators are flashing or lit constantly when the VPM is ready for extended unlocking Off Constantly red V1 leaking Constantly red Off V leaking Red flashing 1x Red flashing 1x Venting error Red flashing x Red flashing x Filling error Red flashing 3x Red flashing 3x Wrong position of DIP switch Red flashing 4x Red flashing 4x Unlock failed Red flashing 5x Red flashing 5x Power at V1.In or V.In before test sequence completed Constantly red Constantly red...all other errors Constantly green Constantly green Release signal 4 10

255 Modification of the program sequence by an application-specific setting of the B/C DIP switches A B C AAAA BBBB CCCC A Test sequence B t test V1, V test time C Number of venting or filling attempts 1100 Test during the start phase before burner ignition 1001 Test after regular shutdown 0011 Test after regular shutdown in reduced mode without additional operating cycles Operating mode "T- Down optimised : after regular switch-off, one valve is tested at a time alternatively, the other valve is kept open. The alternation takes place during release, when removing the test request next time. - burner with frequent starts - longer valve life - reduced power consumption s 1100 Venting 10 (➊) Filling s 0110 Venting 1 Filling s 1001 Venting 1 Filling s The following can be changed via the software: P for test time V1 P3 for test time V If this switch position is used, parameter setting should be checked via the VisionBox. t test For the calculation of the test times, see p. 7 Setting must be higher than the calculated time. t DIP > t test V1, t test V 0011 Venting 3 (➊) Filling 3 (➊) The following can be changed via the software: P3: Number of venting operations P31: Number of filling operations If this switch position is used, parameter setting should be checked via the VisionBox. ➊ For more detailed explanations, see installation examples in the VPM-VC operating and mounting instructions. According to EN1643, 1 filling or 1 emptying attempt for max. 3 s into the burner chamber is admissible (DUNGS as-delivered configuration). At filling and emptying times of 1 s of the gas main valves, max. 3 attempts are admissible. If the number of venting attempts is higher, venting must be into a safe area (LGV vent valve). 5 10

256 Installation examples The functional principle must be selected in accordance with the local regulations Prevent soiling by using appropriate gas filters Use of pilot valves recommended Please note: Switch positions ➊ ➋ ➌ ➍ ➊ According to EN1643, 1 filling or 1 emptying attempt for max. 3 s into the burner chamber is admissible (DUNGS as-delivered configuration). At filling and emptying times of 1 s of the gas main valves, max. 3 attempts are admissible. ➋ When filling or emptying attempts are carried out via pilot valves, the situation described in ➊, shows that the specifications of EN1643 are also met with 10 filling or emptying attempts if pilot valves are used that can reach at most only 1/10 of the maximum gas flow of the main valves. ➌ If the valve check is carried after a regular shutdown, the system setup must ensure that locking the system prevents a valve check during a fault situation. This can only be achieved by safe interruption of the power supply to the VPM when a fault occurs. ➍ If this switch position is used, parameter setting should be checked via the VisionBox. 1a Direct valve check via LGV, venting through roof Valve check system component: VPM-VC, Pp, LGV VPM VC GW 1 V1 P p V LGV (NO) V GW1 V1 V1 in FA OK LGV REMOTE RESET NO NC Pp1 FAULT COM FAULT MULTI COM MULTI NO NC Pp1 Pp DIP-mode: A: ➌ 0011 ➌ ➍ B: xxxx C: ➊ ➍ Parameter: --- TR L1 N N 1b Direct valve check via LGV, venting into the burner chamber Valve check system component: VPM-VC, Pp, LGV VPM VC GW 1 V1 P p V LGV (NO) GW1 V1 in FA OK REMOTE RESET NO NC Pp1 FAULT COM FAULT MULTI COM MULTI NO NC Pp1 Pp DIP-mode: A: ➌ 0011 ➌ ➍ B: xxxx C: 1100 ➋ ➊ ➍ Parameter: --- V V1 LGV TR L1 N N Notes regarding 1a, 1b, : If a valve closed when not powered is replaced instead of a LGV (open when not powered), it must be connected to output V (terminal 8). 6 10

257 Valve check via pilot valves V3, LGV venting through the roof Valve check system component: VPM-VC, Pp, V3, LGV VPM VC GW 1 V1 V3 P p LGV (NO) V V1 V TR GW1 V3 FA OK LGV REMOTE RESET NO NC Pp1 FAULT COM FAULT MULTI COM MULTI NO NC Pp1 Pp DIP mode: A: ➌ 0011 ➌ ➍ B: xxxx C: ➋ 0011 ➋ ➍ Parameter: --- L1 N N N 3 Direct valve check Valve check system component: VPM-VC, Pp VPM VC GW 1 V1 P p V GW1 V1 in FA V in OK REMOTE RESET NO NC FAULT COM FAULT MULTI COM MULTI NO NC DIP mode: A: ➌ 0011 ➌ ➍ B: xxxx C: ➊, ➍ Parameter: --- Pp1 Pp1 Pp V1 V TR N L1 4 Direct valve check via pilot valves, venting into the burner chamber Valve check system component: VPM-VC, Pp, V3, V VPM VC V3 GW 1 V1 P p V V4 V1 V4 GW1 v3 V FA OK REMOTE RESET NO NC Pp1 FAULT COM FAULT MULTI COM MULTI NO NC Pp1 Pp DIP mode: A: ➌ 0011 ➌ ➍ B: xxxx C: 1100 ➋ ➋, ➍ Parameter: --- TR L1 N N N 7 10

258 5a VPM VC GW 1 V1 Valve check via pilot valves, venting to V via LGV type (normally closed) Valve check system component: VPM-VC, Pp, LGV Type (NC) The LGV type is required for opening the gas flow behind V (to the burner chamber or atmosphere), allowing it to be emptied when V is deliberately (during the test) open. The pressure behind V must be able to escape, since otherwise V, as response to "No gas pressure", allows gas to pass in the reverse direction during the test time, if there is still pressure behind V. This allows the pressure to drop in the monitored interspace if V is leaking. During release (automatic burner control is working), the LGV type is closed. DIP mode: FA A: ➌ LGV Typ 0011 ➌ ➍ (NC) B: xxxx C: P p 0011 ➊ ➍ GW1 Parameter: V P1 = 1 V1 in V in OK REMOTE RESET NO NC Pp1 FAULT COM FAULT MULTI COM MULTI NO NC Pp1 Pp v1 v LGV Typ TR N L1 5b VPM VC GW 1 V1 Valve check via pilot valves, venting to V via LGV type (normally closed) into the burner chamber Valve check system component: VPM-VC, Pp, LGV Type (NC) The LGV type is required for opening the gas flow behind V (to the burner chamber or atmosphere). This allows the pressure to drop in the monitored interspace if V is leaking. Emptying takes place via LGV. During release (automatic burner control is working), the LGV and the LGV-type are closed. DIP mode: A: 1100 FA 1001 ➌ 0011 ➌ ➍ LGV Typ (NC) B: xxxx C: ➊ ➍ P p Parameter: GW1 P1 = 1 V V1 in V in OK REMOTE RESET NO NC FAULT COM FAULT MULTI COM MULTI NO NC Pp1 Pp1 Pp v1 v LGV Typ TR N L1 8 10

259 6a VPM VC GW 1 V1 Valve check via pilot valves and LGV, venting to V via LGV type (normally closed) Venting through roof Valve check system component: VPM-VC, Pp, LGV, LGV type (NC) P p LGV (NO) V LGV Typ (NC) GW1 V1 in FA OK REMOTE RESET NO NC Pp1 FAULT COM FAULT MULTI COM MULTI NO NC Pp1 Pp DIP mode: A: ➌ 0011 ➌ ➍ B: xxxx C: ➊ ➍ Parameter: P11 = 1 V v1 LGV Typ LGV TR L1 N N 6b Valve check via pilot valves and LGV, venting to V via LGV type (normally closed) Valve check system component: VPM-VC, Pp, LGV, LGV type (NC) VPM VC GW 1 V1 P p LGV (NO) V LGV Typ (NC) V GW1 v1 V1 in LGV Typ FA OK LGV REMOTE RESET NO NC Pp1 FAULT COM FAULT MULTI COM MULTI NO NC Pp1 Pp DIP mode: A: ➌ 0011 ➌ B: xxxx C: 1100 ➋ ➊ ➍ Parameter: P11 = 1 TR N N L1 9 10

260 Control unit for system leakage tests Type VPM-VC (Valve Check) Version Description Order No. Complete device VPM-VC cpl. 30 VAC VPM-VC cpl. 115 VAC Top part VPM-VC 30 VAC VPM-VC 115 VAC Base 1 piece piece Dimensions Installation 150 ø 4,5 Hat rail mounting Mounting rail 35 mm x ø for PG 9 38, x ø for M16 x 1.5 Mounting bores ø 4.5 Screw ø Accessories Gas pressure switch Depending on the operating pressure, see data sheets LGW...A4 (5.08) GW...A6 (5.01) GW...A4 HP (5.04) Pilot solenoid valves see data sheets DMV... (7.30, 7.37, 7.38), MV 50 (6.1) MVD... (6.0) MPA VisionBox As addition to MPA parameterisation and service box for setting VPM parameters via a PC/laptop

261 µp Automatic Burner Control MPA 5111 Automatic burner control for pneumatically modulating fan-assisted gas burner Description Microprocessor-controlled burner control system for intermittent operation of continuous operation for controlling and monitoring pneumatically modulating fan-assisted gas burners with speedregulated or controlled fan and power controller input. Extension modules for: analog inputs/outputs Stepped motor Continuous operation Accessories Display unit AM09 MPA Service Pack "VisionBox" Classification according to EN 98 FBLLBB FBCLBB FMCLBB FMLCBB The classification depends on the parameterization and the selected extension module Approvals EC type-examination certificate according to the EC gas appliance directive: MPA 5111 CE-0085BT 0056 EC type-examination certificate according to the EC pressure equipment directive: 1 4 MPA 5111 CE0036

262 MPA 5111 Control, regulating and monitoring unit for gas-fired boilers and gas water heater in power-dependent pneumatically modulating operating mode Operating mode: pneumatically modulating via PWM-controlled fan Ionisation flame monitoring Connection for external flame detector with ionisation output Ignition output for external ignition element ~(AC) 30 V Connection technology includes a snap-on 5-pin connector and a boiler connecting plug Gas solenoid valve activation Y1/Y/Y3 ~(AC) 30 V Input for temperature controller Input for air pressure switch Input for min. gas pressure detector Input for min. gas pressure detector for valve check system Fault output ~(AC) 30 V Input for safety chain Burner power control via Power input Alternatively, burner power control via extension module/analog Restart attempt Power-dependent fan speed regulation or fan control Restart delay, time-dependent Controller stop function Set via PC Visualisation of the operating parameters via MPA VisionBox Schematic diagram Remote unlocking MPA VisionBox Gas Display TWI ~(AC) 30 V Hz Temperature controller Power [+] Power [-] MPA 5111 GDW GDW VPS Y1 MBC-WND MBC-VEF GB 055/057 WND Y Y3 Fault Speed controller Ignition Ionisation/FLW LDW M1 Combustion air fan Operating and display unit The operating unit of the MPA5111 is connected via a 6-pin cable. The operating status and error messages are displayed. Settings and inquiries of user and service parameters can be made directly: Parameterization mode Service mode Info mode Fault display and unlocking 4